CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

[001] This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/287,017, entitled "Azide Derivatives for Phototherapy", filed December 16, 2009, which is incorporated by reference to the extent not inconsistent herewith.

BACKGROUND

[002] Optical agents currently play a central role in a large number of in vivo, in vitro and ex vivo clinical procedures including important diagnostic and therapeutic procedures. Photodiagnostic and phototherapeutic agents, for example, include a class of molecules capable of absorbing, emitting, or scattering electromagnetic radiation applied to a biological material, particularly in the visible and near infrared regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. This property of optical agents is used in a range of biomedical applications for visualizing, imaging or otherwise characterizing biological materials and/or achieving a desired therapeutic outcome. Recent developments in targeted administration and delivery of optical agents, and advanced systems and methods for applying and detecting electromagnetic radiation in biological environments has considerably expanded the applicability and effectiveness of optical agents for clinical applications.

[003] Important applications of optical agents that absorb and/or emit in the visible and near- infrared (NIR) region of the electromagnetic spectrum include their use in biomedical imaging and visualization. For example, compounds absorbing and/or emitting light in these regions of the electromagnetic spectrum currently are useful for optical tomography, optoacoustic tomography, optical coherence tomography, confocal scanning laser tomography, optical coherence tomography, and fluorescence endoscopy; techniques which have emerged as essential molecular imaging techniques for imaging and visualizing biological processes at the organ, cellular and subcellular (e.g., molecular) levels. Biomedical images are generated, for example, by detecting electromagnetic radiation, nuclear radiation, acoustic waves, electrical fields, and/or magnetic fields transmitted, emitted and/or scattered by components of a biological sample. Modulation of the energy or intensity of the applied radiation yields patterns of transmitted, scattered and/or emitted radiation, acoustic waves, electrical fields or magnetic fields that contain useful anatomical, physiological, and/or biochemical information. A number of applications of biomedical imaging have matured into robust, widely used clinical techniques including planar projection and tomographic X-ray imaging, magnetic resonance imaging, ultrasound imaging, and gamma ray imaging.

[004] Established optical imaging and visualization techniques are based on monitoring spatial variations in a variety of optical parameters including the intensities, polarization states, and frequencies of transmitted, reflected, and emitted electromagnetic radiation. Given that many biological materials of interest are incompatible with ultraviolet light, research is currently directed to developing and enhancing imaging techniques using visible and near infrared (NIR) radiation (from about 400 nm to about 900 nm). In particular, NIR light (700 nm to 900 nm) is useful for visualizing and imaging deeper regions than visible light because electromagnetic radiation of this wavelength range is capable of substantial penetration (e.g., up to four centimeters) in a range of biological media. Optical imaging and visualization using optical agents has potential to provide a less invasive and safer imaging technology, as compared to X-ray, and other widely used nuclear medicine technologies. Applications of optical imaging for diagnosis and monitoring of the onset, progression and treatment of various disease conditions, including cancer, are well established. (See, e.g., D. A. Benaron and D. K. Stevenson, Optical time-of-f light and absorbance imaging of biologic media, Science, 1993, 259, pp. 1463-1466; R. F. Potter (Series Editor), Medical optical tomography: functional imaging and monitoring, SPIE Optical Engineering Press, Bellingham, 1993; G. J. Tearney et al., In vivo endoscopic optical biopsy with optical coherence tomography, Science, 1997,276, pp. 2037-2039; B. J. Tromberg et al., Non-invasive measurements of breast tissue optical properties using frequency-domain photon migration, Phil. Trans. Royal Society London B, 1997, 352, pp. 661 -668; S. Fantini et al., Assessment of the size, position, and optical properties of breast tumors in vivo by noninvasive optical methods, Appl. Opt, 1998, 37, pp. 1982- 1989; A. Pelegrin et al., Photoimmunodiagnosis with antibody-fluorescein conjugates: in vitro and in vivo preclinical studies, J. Cell Pharmacol., 1992,3, pp. 141 -145).

[005] Optical agents for in vivo and in vitro biomedical imaging, anatomical visualization and monitoring organ function are described in International Patent Publication WO2008/108941 ; U.S. Patent Nos. 5,672,333; 5,698,397; 6,167,297;6,228,344; 6,748,259; 6,838,074; 7,01 1 ,817;

7, 128,896, and 7,201 ,892. In this context, optical imaging agents are commonly used for enhancing signal-to-noise and resolution of optical images and extending these techniques to a wider range of biological settings and media. In addition, use of optical imaging agents having specific molecular recognition and/or tissue targeting functionality has also been demonstrated as effective for identifying, differentiating and characterizing discrete components of a biological sample at the organ, tissue, cellular, and molecular levels. Further, optical agents have been developed as tracers for real time monitoring of physiological function in a patient, including fluorescence-based monitoring of renal function. (See International Patent Publication

PCT/US2007/0149478). Given their recognized utility, considerable research continues to be directed toward developing improved optical agents for biomedical imaging and visualization.

[006] In addition to their important role in biomedical imaging and visualization, optical agents capable of absorption in the visible and NIR regions have also been extensively developed for clinical applications for phototherapy. The benefits of phototherapy using optical agents are widely acknowledged as this technique has the potential to provide efficacy comparable to radiotherapy, while entirely avoiding exposure of non-target organs and tissue to harmful ionizing radiation. Photodynamic therapy (PDT), in particular, has been used effectively for localized superficial or endoluminal malignant and premalignant conditions. The clinical efficacy of PDT has also been demonstrated for the treatment of various other diseases, injuries, and disorders, including cardiovascular disorders such as atherosclerosis and vascular restenosis, inflammatory diseases, ophthalmic diseases and dermatological diseases. Visudyne and Photofrin, for example, are two optical agents that have been developed for the treatment of macular degeneration of the eye and for ablation of several types of tumors, respectively. (See, e.g., Schmidt-Drfurth, U.; Bringruber, R.; Hasan, T. Phototherapy in ocular vascular disease. IEEE Journal of Selected Topics in Quantum Electronics 1996, 2, 988-996; Mlkvy, P.; Messmann, H.; Regula, J.; Conio, M.; Pauer, M.; Millson, C.E.; MacRobert, A.J.; Brown, S.G. Phototherapy for gastrointestinal tumors using three photosensitizers - ALA induced PPIX, Photofrin, and MTHPC. A pilot study. Neoplasma 1998, 45, 157-161 ; Grosjean, P.; Wagieres, G.; Fontolliet, C; Van Den Bergh, H.; Monnier, P. Clinical phototherapy for superficial cancer in the esophagus and the bronchi: 514 nm compared with 630 nm light irradiation after sensitization with Photofrin II. British Journal of Cancer 1998, 77, 1989-1955; Mitton, D.; Ackroyd, R. Phototherapy of Barrett's oesophagus and oesophageal carcinoma - how I do it. Photodi agnostics and Phototherapy 2006, 3, 96-98; and Li, L; Luo, R.; Liao, W.; Zhang, M.; Luo, Y.; Miao, J. Clinical study of photofrin phototherapy for the treatment of relapse nasopharyngeal carcinoma. Photodi agnostics and Phototherapy 2006, 3, 266-271 ; See, Zheng Huang "A Review of Progress in Clinical Photodynamic Therapy", Technol Cancer Res Treat. 2005 June; 4(3): 283-293; "Photodiagnosis And Photodynamic Therapy", Brown S, Brown EA, Walker I. The present and future role of photodynamic therapy in cancer treatment. Lancet Oncol. 2004;5:497-508; Triesscheijn M, Baas P, Schellens JHM. "Photodynamic Therapy in Oncology"; The Oncologist. 2006;1 1 :1034-1044; and Dougherty TJ, Gomer CJ, Henderson BW, Jori G, Kessel D, Korbelik M, Moan J, Peng Q. Photodynamic Therapy. J. Natl. Cancer Inst.

1998;90:899-905).

[007] Phototherapy is carried out by administration and delivery of a photosensitizer to a therapeutic target tissue (e.g., tumor, lesion, organ, etc.) followed by photoactivation of the photosensitizer by exposure to applied electromagnetic radiation. Phototherapeutic procedures require photosensitizers that are relatively chemically inert, and become activated only upon irradiation with light of an appropriate wavelength. Selective tissue injury can be induced with light when photosensitizers bind to the target tissues, either directly or through attachment to a bioactive carrier or targeting moiety. Photosensitizers essentially operate via two different pathways, classified as Types 1 and 2. A primary distinction between these classes of

photosensitizers is that the Type 1 process operates via direct energy or electron transfer from the photosensitizer to the cellular components thereby inducing cell death, whereas the Type 2 process involves first the conversion of singlet oxygen from the triplet oxygen found in the cellular environment followed by either direct reaction of singlet oxygen with the cellular components or further generating secondary reactive oxygen species (ROS) (e.g. peroxides, hydroxyl radical, etc.) which will induce cell death. Type 1 agents may also interact with oxygen, if present, to produce ROS, but this is not a necessary requirement, and does not have to be not mediated via singlet oxygen. [008] The Type 1 mechanism proceeds via a multistep process involving activation of the photosensitizer by absorption of electromagnetic radiation followed by direct interaction of the activated photosensitizer, or reactive intermediates derived from the photosensitizer, with the target tissue, for example via energy transfer, electron transfer or reaction with reactive species (e.g., radicals, ions, nitrenes, carbenes etc.) resulting in tissue damage. The Type 1 mechanism can be schematically represented by the following sequence of reactions:

hv PHOTOSENSITIZER ^* REACTIVE INTERMEDIATES

PHOTOSENSITIZER

(Excited State) (e.g. Radicals)

Collision with Cell Components

CELL DEATH +

wherein hv indicates applied electromagnetic radiation and (PHOTOSENSITIZER) ^* indicates excited state of the photosensitizer. The Type 2 mechanism proceeds via a multi-step process involving activation of the photosensitizer by absorption of electromagnetic radiation followed by energy transfer from the activated photosensitizer to oxygen molecules in the environment of the target tissue. This energy transfer process generates excited state oxygen ( ¹ 0 ₂ ) which subsequently interacts with the target tissue so as to cause tissue damage. The Type 2 mechanism can be schematically represented by the following sequence of reactions:

_D unTne «i eiTi 7CD hv „ PHOTOSENSITIZER ^{* 3} 0 ² „ _/e . . . _

PHOTOSENSITIZER ► _{(Excited state)} ► 0 ₂ (Singlet Oxygen)

Collision with Cell Components REACTIVE OXYGEN SPECIES CELL DEATH _{(e g Hydroxy} | _radica | _s ) wherein hv indicates applied electromagnetic radiation, (PHOTOSENSITIZER) ^* indicates photoactivated photosensitizer, ³ 0 ₂ is ground state triplet oxygen, and ¹ 0 ₂ is excited state singlet oxygen.

[009] The biological basis of tissue injury brought about by tumor phototherapeutic agents has been the subject of intensive study. Various biochemical mechanisms for tissue damage have been postulated, which include the following: a) cancer cells up-regulate the expression of low density lipoprotein (LDL) receptors, and phototherapy (PDT) agents bind to LDL and albumin selectively; (b) porphyrin-like substances are selectively taken up by proliferative neovasculature; (c) tumors often contain increased number of lipid bodies and are thus able to bind to hydrophobic photosensitizers; (d) a combination of "leaky" tumor vasculature and reduced lymphatic drainage causes porphyrin accumulation referred to as "EPR" (enhanced permeability and retention) effect; (e) tumor cells may have increased capabilities for phagocytosis or pinocytosis of porphyrin aggregates; (f) tumor associated macrophages may be largely responsible for the concentration of photosensitizers in tumors; and (g) cancer cells may undergo apoptosis induced by photosensitizers. Among these mechanisms, (f) and (g) are the most general and, of these two alternatives, there is a general consensus that (f) is the most likely mechanism by which the phototherapeutic effect of porphyrin-like compounds is induced.

[010] Much of the research in the past several decades has focused on developing

phototherapeutic agents based on the Type 2 (PDT) mechanism. Surprisingly, there has been considerably less attention devoted to Type 1 phototherapeutic agents despite the fact that there are numerous classes of compounds that could potentially be useful for phototherapy that function via this mechanism. Unlike Type 2, the Type 1 process does not require oxygen; and hence Type 1 photosensitizers are expected to be potentially more effective than Type 2 photosensitizers under hypoxic environments typically found in solid tumors. Second, the Type 1 mechanism involves two steps (photoexcitation and direct energy transfer), whereas the Type 2 mechanism involves three steps (photoexcitation, singlet oxygen generation, and energy transfer). Further, studies have recently shown that production of high levels of reactive oxygen species can induce an anti-inflammatory response, which may result in blood vessels to become more "leaky," thereby increasing the risk of metastasis (Chen, B.; Pogue, B.; Luna, J.M.; Hardman, R.L.; Hoopes, P.J.; Hasan, T. Tumor vascular permeabilization by vascular-targeting photosensitization: effects, mechanism, and therapeutic implications. Clinical Cancer Research 2006, 12(3, Pt.1 ), 917-923). Targeted Type 1 photosensitizers, by their very nature, are not expected to produce reactive oxygen species; rather, the reactive species produced by these photosensitizers will immediately react with the cellular component at the binding site and trigger cell death. Type 2

phototherapeutic agents, however, do have certain advantages over Type 1 agents. For example, Type 2 agents can potentially be catalytic, i.e., the Type 2 photosensitizer is regenerated once the energy transfer to the oxygen has taken place. In contrast, Type 1 process would generally be expected to require stoichiometric amounts of the photosensitizer in some clinical settings. Table B1 provides a summary of the attributes of Type 1 and Type 2 phototherapeutic agents. Given these attributes, it is clear that development of safe and effective Type 1 phototherapeutic agents would be useful to complement the existing therapeutic approaches provided by Type 2 agents, and to enhance the therapeutic portfolio available for clinicians.

Table B1. Comparison between Type 1 and Type 2 processes for phototherapy.

TYPE 1 PROCESS TYPE 2 PROCESS

Two-step process. Three-step process.

Not well explored. Very well studied.

Light of any wavelength can be used. Requires red light for optimal performa Does not require oxygen. Requires oxygen.

Large classes of compounds. Limited classes of compounds.

Stoichiometric. Potentially catalytic. Intramolecular energy transfer to generate Intermolecular energy transfer to generate reactive species. reactive oxygen species.

No products in the market. Two products are in use.

[011] Specific optical, chemical and pharmacokinetic properties of optical agents are necessary for their effective use in Type 1 and Type 2 phototherapeutic applications. For example, optical agents for these applications preferably have strong absorption in the visible or NIR regions, and also exhibit low systemic toxicity, low mutagenicity, and rapid clearance from the blood stream. These optical agents must also be compatible with effective administration and delivery to the target tissue, for example by having reasonable solubilities and a low tendency for aggregation in solution. Upon excitation by absorption of visible and NIR electromagnetic radiation, optical agents for Type 1 and 2 phototherapy preferably provide large yields of singlet oxygen (Type 2) or other reactive species, such as free radicals, nitrenes, carbenes or ions, capable of causing local tissue damage. Both Type 1 and Type 2 photosensitizers typically undergo photoactivation followed by intersystem crossing to their lowest triplet excited state, and therefore, a relatively long triplet lifetime is usually beneficial for providing effective tissue damage. Other useful properties of optical agents for these applications include chemical inertness and stability, insensitivity of optical properties to changes in pH, and compatibility with conjugation to ligands providing targeted delivery via molecular recognition functionality. Multifunctional optical agents have also been developed for phototherapy that are capable of providing both imaging and visual functionality upon excitation at a first range of wavelengths and phototherapeutic functionality upon excitation at a second range of wavelength. (See, US Patent No. 7,235,685 and International Patent Publication WO 2007/106436).

[012] Optical agents for some phototherapeutic applications preferably exhibit a high degree of selectivity for the target tissue. Selectivity provided by optical agents facilitates effective delivery to a target tissue of interest and provides a means of differentiating different tissue classes during therapy. Selective tissue injury can be induced with light when photosensitizers bind to the target tissues either directly, as in the case of Photofrin, or through attachment to a bioactive carrier, or through in situ biochemical synthesis of the photosensitizer in localized area, as in the case of 2- aminolevulinic acid, which is an intermediate in the biosynthesis of porphyrin. Previous studies have shown that certain dyes selectively localize in tumors and serve as a powerful probe for the detection and treatment of small cancers. (D. A. Belinier et al., Murine pharmacokinetics and antitumor efficacy of the photodynamic sensitizer 2-[l-hexyloxyethyl]-2-devinyl pyropheophorbide- a, J. Photochem. Photobiol., 1993, 20, pp. 55-61 ; G. A. Wagnieres et al., In vivo fluorescence spectroscopy and imaging for oncological applications, Photochem. Photobiol., 1998, 68, pp. 603- 632; J. S. Reynolds et al., Imaging of spontaneous canine mammary tumors using fluorescent contrast agents, Photochem. Photobiol., 1999, 70, pp. 87-94). It is recognized in some situations, however, that many dyes do not localize preferentially in malignant tissues. A number of strategies have been developed for imparting selectivity and/or targeting functionality by incorporation of a molecular recognition component in the optical agent. For example, targeting of fluorescent dyes to tumors has been demonstrated using dye conjugates with antibodies and peptides for diagnostic imaging of tumors. (See, Achilefu et al., Novel receptor-targeted fluorescent contrast agents for in vivo imaging of tumors, Investigative Radiology, 2000, 35, pp. 479-485; Ballou et al., Tumor labeling in vivo using cyanine conjugated monoclonal antibodies, Cancer Immunology and Immunotherapy, 1995, 41 , pp. 257-263; and Licha et al., New contrast agent for optical imaging: acid cleavable conjugates of cyanine dyes with biomolecules, in

Biomedical Imaging: Reporters, Dyes and Instrumentation, Proceedings of SPIE, 1999, 3600, pp. 29-35). Therefore, receptor-target mediated phototherapy agents provide a promising pathway for achieving site selective activation at various target tissues.

[013] As will be generally recognized from the foregoing, a need currently exists for optical agents for biomedical applications. Specifically, optical agents for imaging, visualization and phototherapy are needed having enhanced specificity for important target tissue classes, such as tumors and other lesions. In addition, optical agents are needed having enhanced optical, physical, chemical and pharmacokinetic properties for administration, delivery and excitation with electromagnetic radiation.

SUMMARY

[014] The invention relates generally to optical agents for biomedical applications, including phototherapy. Azide derivatives of some embodiments have an azido group that is directly attached to a substituted phenyl ring having a combination of electron donating groups and electron withdrawing groups. Optical agents of the invention include phototherapeutic agents, including Type 1 phototherapeutic agents, that enable a versatile phototherapy platform for treatment of a range of pathological conditions, including the treatment of cancers, stensosis and inflammation. The invention further provides preparations and formulations comprising azide derivatives and related methods of making and using azide optical agents in in vivo or ex vivo biomedical procedures.

[015] In some embodiments, for example, the invention provides azide compounds for phototherapy methods having a photolabile azido group capable of undergoing photoactivated bond dissociation and/or nitrogen extrusion processes to produce reactive species, such as singlet or triplet nitrenes, that achieve a desired therapeutic effect, such as selective and/or localized tissue damage and/or cell death. Optical agents of an aspect of the invention include

compositions having a substituted phenyl group with a combination of electron donating and electron withdrawing groups as ring substituents selected to provide appreciable absorption of electromagnetic radiation in the visible and/or NIR regions of the spectrum. Incorporation of electron donating and withdrawing groups in some compounds is particularly beneficial for providing a visible or NIR chromophore group coupled to a -N ₃ group that enables photodissociation and/or photofragmentation upon exposure to electromagnetic radiation having wavelengths in the visible and/or near infrared regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. In an embodiment, for example, compounds of the invention have a substituted phenyl ring with at least one, and optionally two, electron donating group(s), such as a secondary amino group, ether group or thioether group, provided ortho to an electron withdrawing group, such as a nitro group, cyano group, carboxylic acid group, ester group, thioester group, carbonyl group, or sulfonyl group.

[016] In some embodiments, the optical properties of compounds of the invention can be selectively adjusted (e.g., tuned) by selection of suitable modifications to substituents of the central substituted phenyl ring. In an aspect of this embodiment, for example, the absorption and emission spectra of certain compounds of the invention is tuned by selection of the composition and linking chemistry of electron donating group and electron withdrawing group substituents of the central substituted phenyl ring. In an embodiment, for example, the absorption and emission spectra of compounds of the invention is shifted toward the red region of the electromagnetic spectrum by incorporation of a secondary amine substituent provided in an ortho configuration with respect to a nitro group, cyano group, carboxylic acid group, ester group, thioester group, carbonyl group, or sulfonyl group. Compounds of this aspect of the invention are particularly beneficial for certain applications including biomedical procedures capable of enhanced tissue penetration of exciting electromagnetic radiation.

[017] Optical agents further include conjugates of the present azide derivatives, such as bioconjugates. In some embodiments, for example, the invention provides compositions including at least one targeting ligand, such as a polypeptide, protein, oligonucleotide, carbohydrate, antibody, or other biomolecule, or fragments thereof, capable of providing molecular recognition and/or targeting functionality.

[018] In an aspect, the invention provides azide compounds having an -N ₃ group linked to a substituted phenyl ring having electron donating group and electron withdrawing group

substituents useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods, including Type 1 phototherapy. In an embodiment, for example, the invention provides a compound for use in a phototherapy procedure, the compound being of the formula (FX1 ):

(FX1 ); wherein: each R ¹ is -N0 ₂ , -CN, -C0 ₂ R ⁴ , -CONR ⁵ R ⁶ , -S0 ₂ R ⁷ or -(L),

W-Y ¹ ; each of R ² and R ³ is independently -F, -NR ⁸ R ⁹ , -OR ¹⁰ , -SR ¹¹ or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁴ - R ¹¹ is independently hydrogen, C1-C20 alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃ o aryl, C ₅ -C ₃ o heteroaryl, d- C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each Y ¹ is independently hydrogen, FL or Bm; each L is independently C1-C10 alkylene, C3-C10 cycloalkylene, C5-C ₃₀ arylene, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroarylene, C ₂ -C ₁₀ alkenylene, C ₃ -C ₁₀ cycloalkenylene, C ₂ -C ₁₀ alkynylene, ethenylene, ethynylene, phenylene, 1 -aza-2,5-dioxocyclopentylene, -(CH ₂ CH20) _a -, -(CHOH) _b -, - (CH2)n(CH2CH ₂ 0) _a -, -(CH ₂ )n(CHOH ) _b -, or 1 ,4-diazacyclohexylene; each W is independently a single bond, -(CH ₂ ) _n - -(HCCH) _m - -0-, -S-, -SO-, -S0 ₂ - -SO ₃ -, -OS0 ₂ -, -NR ²⁰ -, -CO-, - COO-, -OCO-, -OCOO-, -CONR ²¹ -, -NR ²² CO- -OCONR ²³ -, -NR ²⁴ COO-, -NR ²⁵ CONR ²⁶ -, - NR ²⁷ CSNR ²⁸ -, -0(CH ₂ ) _n -, -S(CH ₂ ) _n -, -NR ²⁹ (CH ₂ ) _n -, -CO(CH ₂ ) _n - -COO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -OCO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -OCOO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -CONR ³⁰ (CH ₂ ) _n -, -NR ³¹ CO(CH ₂ ) _n - -OCONR ³² (CH ₂ ) _n -, -NR ³³ COO(CH ₂ ) _n -, - -NR ³⁶ CSNR ³⁷ (CH ₂ ) _n - or -0(CH ₂ ) _n NR ³⁸ CO(CH ₂ ) _n -; each of R ²⁰ - R ³⁸ is independently hydrogen, Ci-C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ heteroaryl, or C ₅ -C ₂₀ aryl; each FL is independently a dye group corresponding to a pyrazine, a thiazole, a phenylxanthene, a phenothiazine, a phenoselenazine, a cyanine, an indocyanine, a squaraine, a dipyrrolo

pyrimidone, an anthraquinone, a tetracene, a quinoline, an acridine, an acridone, a

phenanthridine, an azo dye, a rhodamine, a phenoxazine, an azulene, an aza-azulene, a triphenyl methane dye, an indole, a benzoindole, an indocarbocyanine, a Nile Red dye, or a

benzoindocarbocyanine; each Bm is independently an amino acid, a peptide, a protein, a nucleoside, a nucleotide, an enzyme, a carbohydrate, a glycomimetic, an oligomer, a lipid, a polymer, an antibody, an antibody fragment, a mono- or polysaccharide comprising 1 to 50 carbohydrate units, a glycopeptide, a glycoprotein, a peptidomimetic, a drug, a steroid, a hormone, an aptamer, a receptor, a metal chelating agent, a polynucleotide comprising 2 to 50 nucleic acid units, or a polypeptide comprising 2 to 30 amino acid units; each of a and b is independently an integer selected from the range of 1 to 100; each e is independently 0 or 1 ; and each of m and n is independently an integer selected from the range of 1 to 10; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof.

[019] In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound for use in a phototherapy procedure, the compound being of the formula (FX1 ):

(FX1 ); wherein: each R ¹ is -N0 ₂ , -CN, -C0 ₂ R ⁴ , -CONR ⁵ R ⁶ , -S0 ₂ R ⁷ or -(L) _e -

W-Y ¹ ; each of R ² and R ³ is independently -F, -NR ⁸ R ⁹ , -OR ¹⁰ , -SR ¹¹ or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁸ and R ⁹ is independently hydrogen, Ci-C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C5-C ₃₀ aryl, C5-C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C ₃ -C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, Ci-C ₂ alkylenehydroxy, C4-C ₁₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e - W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁴ - R ⁷ and R ¹⁰ - R ¹¹ is independently hydrogen, C C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C5-C30 aryl, C5-C30 heteroaryl, Ci-C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, Ci-C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e - W-Y ¹ ; each Y ¹ is independently hydrogen, FL or Bm; each L is independently C1-C10 alkylene, C ₃ - C-io cycloalkylene, C ₅ -C ₃₀ arylene, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroarylene, C ₂ -C ₁₀ alkenylene, C ₃ -C ₁₀

cycloalkenylene, C2-C10 alkynylene, ethenylene, ethynylene, phenylene, 1 -aza-2,5- dioxocyclopentylene, -(CH ₂ CH ₂ 0) _a -, -(CHOH) _b - -(CH ₂ ) _n (CH ₂ CH ₂ 0) _a -, -(CH ₂ ) _n (CHOH) _b -, or 1 ,4- diazacyclohexylene; each W is independently a single bond, -(CH ₂ ) _n - -(HCCH) _m - -0-, -S-, - SO- -S0 ₂ - -SO ₃ -, -OS0 ₂ - -NR ²⁰ -, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -OCOO-, -CONR ²¹ -, -NR ²² CO- , -OCONR ²³ -, -NR ²⁴ COO- -NR ²⁵ CONR ²⁶ -, -NR ²⁷ CSNR ²⁸ -, -0(CH ₂ ) _n -, -S(CH ₂ ) _n -, - NR ²⁹ (CH ₂ )n- -CO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -COO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -OCO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -OCOO(CH ₂ )n- -CONR ³⁰ (CH ₂ ) _n -, - NR ³¹ CO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -OCONR ³² (CH ₂ ) _n -, -NR ³³ COO(CH ₂ ) _n - - NR ³⁶ CSNR ³⁷ (CH ₂ ) _n -, or -0(CH ₂ ) _n NR ³⁸ CO(CH ₂ ) _n -; each of R ²⁰ - R ³⁸ is independently hydrogen, C C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ heteroaryl, or C ₅ -C ₂₀ aryl; each FL is independently a dye group corresponding to a pyrazine, a thiazole, a phenylxanthene, a phenothiazine, a

phenoselenazine, a cyanine, an indocyanine, a squaraine, a dipyrrolo pyrimidone, an

anthraquinone, a tetracene, a quinoline, an acridine, an acridone, a phenanthridine, an azo dye, a rhodamine, a phenoxazine, an azulene, an aza-azulene, a triphenyl methane dye, an indole, a benzoindole, an indocarbocyanine, a Nile Red dye, or a benzoindocarbocyanine; each Bm is independently an amino acid, a peptide, a protein, a nucleoside, a nucleotide, an enzyme, a carbohydrate, a glycomimetic, an oligomer, a lipid, a polymer, an antibody, an antibody fragment, a mono- or polysaccharide comprising 1 to 50 carbohydrate units, a glycopeptide, a glycoprotein, a peptidomimetic, a drug, a steroid, a hormone, an aptamer, a receptor, a metal chelating agent, polynucleotide comprising 2 to 50 nucleic acid units, or a polypeptide comprising 2 to 6 or 8 to 30 amino acid units; each of a and b is independently an integer selected from the range of 1 to 100; each e is independently 0 or 1 ; and each of m and n is independently an integer selected from the range of 1 to 10; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof.

[020] In an embodiment, the composition of R ¹ , R ² , and R ³ is selected such that the compound absorbs electromagnetic radiation having wavelengths selected over the range of 350 nanometers to 1300 nanometers, and optionally wavelengths over the range of 400 nanometers to 900 nanometers. In an embodiment, the composition of R ¹ , R ² , and R ³ is selected such that the compound undergoes cleavage of a nitrogen-nitrogen bond of the -N ₃ group upon exposure to electromagnetic radiation having wavelengths selected over the range of 350 nanometers to 1300 nanometers, and optionally wavelengths selected over the range of 400 nanometers to 900 nanometers. In an embodiment, exposure of the compound to electromagnetic radiation having wavelengths selected over the range of 350 nanometers to 1300 nanometers generates nitrogen and a nitrene radical.

[021] As used throughout the present description, reference to embodiments wherein e is equal to 0 refers to compounds where L is not present, and reference to embodiments wherein e is equal to 1 refers to compounds where L is present. By means of example, in the context of embodiments wherein R ³ is -OR ¹⁰ and R ¹⁰ is -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ , when e is equal to 0 then W is directly linked to the O atom of the group -OR ¹⁰ by a single bond. By means of example, in the context of embodiments wherein R ³ is -OR ¹⁰ and R ¹⁰ is -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ , when e is equal to 0 and W is a single bond, then Y ¹ is directly linked to the O atom of the group -OR ¹⁰ by a single bond. In an embodiment, for example wherein R ² is -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ , and e is 0 and W is a single bond, Y ¹ is directly bonded to the central phenyl group. In an embodiment, for example wherein R ³ is -(L) _e - W-Y ¹ , and e is 0 and W is a single bond, Y ¹ is directly bonded to the central phenyl group.

[022] As used throughout the present description, the expression "a group corresponding to" an indicated species expressly includes a radical (including a monovalent, divalent and trivalent radical), for example an aromatic radical or heterocyclic aromatic radical, of the species or group of species provided in a covalently bonded configuration, optionally with one or more substituents, including but not limited to one or more electron donating groups, electron withdrawing groups, fluorophore groups, photosensitizer groups and/or targeting ligands.

[023] In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ² is -F and R ³ is -NR ⁸ R ⁹ . In an

embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ² is -F and R ³ is -OR ¹⁰ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ² is -F and R ³ is -SR ¹¹ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1 ), wherein R ² is -F and R ³ is -OR ¹⁰ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1 ), wherein R ¹ is -NO ₂ and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -NR ⁸ R ⁹ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ¹ is -NO ₂ and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -OR ¹⁰ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1 ), wherein R ¹ is -NO ₂ and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -SR ¹¹ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1 ), wherein R ¹ is -CN and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -NR ⁸ R ⁹ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ¹ is -CN and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -OR ¹⁰ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1 ), wherein R ¹ is -CN and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -SR ¹¹ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1 ), wherein R ¹ is -CO ₂ R ⁴ and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -NR ⁸ R ⁹ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ¹ is -C0 ₂ R ⁴ and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -OR ¹⁰ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ¹ is -C0 ₂ R ⁴ and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -SR ¹¹ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ¹ is -CONR ⁵ R ⁶ and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -N R ⁸ R ⁹ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ¹ is -CON R ⁵ R ⁶ and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -OR ¹⁰ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1 ), wherein R ¹ is -CONR ⁵ R ⁶ and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -SR ¹¹ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ¹ is -SO2R ⁷ and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -N R ⁸ R ⁹ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ¹ is -S0 ₂ R ⁷ and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -OR ¹⁰ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ¹ is -S0 ₂ R ⁷ and at least one of R ² and R ³ is -SR ¹¹ .

[024] In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1 ), wherein R ³ is -NR ⁸ R ⁹ wherein R ⁸ and R ⁹ are as described in the context of formula (FX1 ). In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ¹ is -NO2, -CO2R ⁴ or -CONR ⁵ R ⁶ wherein R ⁵ to R ⁶ are as described in the context of formula (FX1 ). In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for

phototherapy methods having formula (FX1 ), wherein R ² is -F or -NR ⁸ R ⁹ wherein R ⁸ and R ⁹ are as described in the context of formula (FX1 ). In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ¹ is -CO2R ⁴ or -NO2, R ² is -F, and R ³ is -NR ⁸ R ⁹ or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ wherein R ⁴ , R ⁸ , R ⁹ , L, e, W, and Y ¹ are as described in the context of formula (FX1 ). In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein at least one of R ¹ , R ² and R ³ is -(L) _e -W-Bm wherein L, e, W, and Bm are as described in the context of formula (FX1 ).

[025] In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1 ), wherein R ³ is -NR ⁸ R ⁹ ; R ⁸ is -(CH ₂ ) _n OR ⁴⁰ ; and R ⁴⁰ is independently hydrogen, C1-C20 alkyl, C3-C20 cycloalkyl, C5-C20 heteroaryl, or C5-C20 aryl; and n and R ⁹ are as described in the context of formula (FX1 ). In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ³ is -N R ⁸ R ⁹ ; R ⁸ is -(CH ₂ ) _n C0 ₂ R ⁴¹ ; and R ⁴¹ is independently hydrogen, C C ₂ o alkyl, C ₃ - C20 cycloalkyl, C5-C20 heteroaryl, or C5-C20 aryl; and n and R ⁹ are as described in the context of formula (FX1 ).

[026] In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ³ is -NR ⁸ R ⁹ , wherein optionally each of R ⁸ and R ⁹ is hydrogen or C-|-C ₆ alkyl. In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ³ is -NR ⁸ H, and optionally R ³ is -NH ₂ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ¹ is N0 ₂ , -C0 ₂ R ⁴ or - CONR ⁵ R ⁶ , wherein optionally each of R ⁴ to R ⁶ is hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl. In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1 ), wherein R ² is -F or -NR ⁸ R ⁹ , wherein optionally each of R ⁸ and R ⁹ is hydrogen or C-|-C ₆ alkyl. In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ² is -NR ⁸ H, and optionally R ² is -NH ₂ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ¹ is N0 ₂ or -C0 ₂ R ⁴ , R ² is -F or -NR ⁸ R ⁹ , and R ³ is -NR ⁸ R ⁹ , wherein optionally each of R ⁴ , R ⁸ , and is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl. In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein at least one of R ¹ , R ² and R ³ is a group containing Bm, and optionally wherein at least one of R ¹ , R ² and R ³ is -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ . In an embodiment, the invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ³ is -NR ⁸ R ⁹ , R ⁹ is -(CH ₂ ) _n OR ⁴⁰ , and R ⁴⁰ is independently hydrogen, Ci-C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ heteroaryl, or C ₅ -C ₂₀ aryl.

[027] The invention further provides compounds useful as optical agents for phototherapy methods having formula (FX1), wherein R ¹ , R ² and R ³ are selected to provide a central substituted phenyl ring having electron donating group and electron withdrawing group substituent

combinations selected to provide a chromophore capable of excitation upon exposure to electromagnetic radiation having wavelengths selected over the range of 350 nanometers to 1300 nanometers, and optionally in some embodiments wavelengths selected over the range of 400 nanometers to 900 nanometers. In an embodiment, for example, the invention provides compounds for use in a phototherapy method being of the formula (FX2), (FX3) or (FX4):

[028]

(FX4); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof; wherein R ¹ , R ² , R ⁸ , R ⁹ , R ¹⁰ , and R ¹¹ are as described in connection with formula (FX1 ). In an embodiment, for example, the invention provides compounds for use in a phototherapy method being of the formula (FX5), (FX6), (FX7), (FX8), (FX9) or (FX10):

(FX10); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof; wherein R ² , R ⁴ , R ⁸ , R ⁹ , R ¹⁰ , and R ¹¹ are as described in connection with formula (FX1 ). In an embodiment, for example, the invention provides compounds for use in a phototherapy method being of the formula (FX11 ), (FX12), (FX13), (FX14), (FX15), (FX16), (FX17), (FX18), (FX19), (FX20), (FX21 ) or (FX22):

T ^N 3 (FX22); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof; wherein

R ⁴ , R ⁸ , R ⁹ , R ¹⁰ , and R ¹¹ are as described in connection with formula (FX1 ).

[030] In an embodiment, the invention provides optical agents for phototherapy having a ligand component for targeting the optical agent to a selected organ, tissue, or other cell material.

Incorporation of a targeting ligand or molecular recognition component in some compounds and methods of the invention enables targeted delivery such that at least a portion of phototherapeutic agent administered to a subject preferentially accumulates at a preselected, desired site, such as the site of an organ, tissue, site of inflammation, tumor or other lesion, prior to or during exposure to electromagnetic radiation.

[031] Targeting ligands in some azide derivatives are provided as a component of any of R ¹ , R ² , or R ³ , as referenced in Formula FX1. In an embodiment, for example, the invention provides compounds for use in a phototherapy method being of the formula (FX23), (FX24), or (FX25):

wherein R ¹ , R ² , R ⁸ , L, W, e and Bm are as described in connection with formula (FX1 ). In an embodiment, example, the invention provides compounds for use in a phototherapy method being of the formula (FX26), or (FX27): (FX26), or (FX27); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof; wherein R ² , R ³ , R ⁵ , L, W, e and Bm are as described in connection with formula (FX1 ). In an embodiment, example, the invention provides compounds for use in a phototherapy method being of the formula (FX28), (FX29), (FX30), (FX31 ), or (FX60):

(FX60); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof; wherein R ¹ ,

R ³ , R ⁸ , L, W, e and Bm are as described in connection with formula (FX1 ). In an embodiment, example, the invention provides compounds for use in a phototherapy method being of the formula (FX32) or (FX33): (FX32) or (FX33); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof; wherein R and R are as described in connection with formula (FX1 ). In an embodiment, example, the invention provides compounds for use in a phototherapy method being any of the formula (FX42), (FX43), (FX44), (FX45), (FX46), (FX47), (FX48), or (FX49):

(FX44), (FX45), (FX46),

lt or ester thereof; wherein R ¹ , R ² , R ³ , R ⁵ , R ⁸ , L, W, e and Bm are as described in connection with formula (FX1 ). [032] In an embodiment, for example, the invention includes compounds of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60), wherein at least one of R ⁸ and R ⁹ is -CH ₃ . In an embodiment, for example, the invention includes compounds of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60), wherein at least one of R ⁸ and R ⁹ is hydrogen. In an embodiment, for example, the invention includes compounds of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60), wherein each Bm is independently a peptide, a polypeptide comprising 2 to 30 amino acid units, a protein, an aptamer, an antibody, or an antibody fragment thereof. In an embodiment, for example, the invention includes compounds of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60), wherein e is 0. In an embodiment, for example, the invention includes compounds of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60), wherein W is -CONR ²¹ -, -NR ²² CO- -OCONR ²³ -, -NR ²⁴ COO- or -NR ²⁵ CONR ²⁶ - and R ²¹ to R ^2e are as described in connection with formula (FX1 ).

[033] In an embodiment, for example, the invention includes compounds of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60), wherein each Bm is independently an antibody or fragment thereof. In an aspect, the invention includes compounds of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60), wherein each Bm independently comprises an antibody fragment corresponding to anti-folate receptor 1 specific antibody (FOLR1-Ab), optionally comprising a group corresponding to a pyrazine. In an embodiment, for example, the invention includes compounds of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60), wherein each Bm independently comprises an amino acid, for example each Bm may independently comprise a folate group or the amino acid sequence Ser-Phe-Phe-Tyr-Leu-Arg-Ser. In an embodiment, for example, the invention includes compounds of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60), wherein each Bm is independently a peptide or polypeptide comprising 2 to 30 amino acid units. In an aspect, for example, the invention includes compounds of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60), wherein each Bm

independently comprises a group corresponding to linaclotide. In an embodiment, for example, the invention includes compounds of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60), wherein each Bm is independently a protein. In an embodiment, for example, the invention includes compounds of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60), wherein each Bm is independently an antibody or fragment thereof. In an embodiment, for example, the invention includes compounds of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60), wherein each Bm is independently a polynucleotide comprising 1 to 50 nucleic acid units. In an embodiment, for example, the invention includes compounds of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60), wherein each Bm is independently an aptamer. A range of linking chemistry is useful for linking a targeting ligand to the central substituted phenyl ring of the azide derivatives. In an embodiment, for example, W is -CONR ²¹ -, -NR ²² CO- -OCONR ²³ -, - NR ²⁴ COO- or -NR ²⁵ CONR ²⁶ -. In an embodiment, e is 0. In an embodiment, W is -(CH ₂ ) _Z -; wherein z is an integer from 1 to 10. In an embodiment, at least one of R ⁸ and R ⁹ is -CH ₃ . In an embodiment, at least one of R and R is hydrogen. In an embodiment, Bm is a peptide, a polypeptide comprising 2 to 30 amino acid units, a protein, an aptamer, or an antibody or a fragment thereof.

[034] The invention provides azide derivatives for phototherapy that absorb appreciably in the visible region of the electromagnetic spectrum. In an embodiment, for example, the invention provides compounds for use in a phototherapy method being of the formula (FX34), (FX35), (FX36), (FX37), (FX38), (FX39), (FX40), (FX41 ), (FX56), (FX57), (FX58), or (FX59):

(FX58), or

(FX59); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof.

[035] In an embodiment, for example, the invention provides compounds for use in a phototherapy method being of the formula (FX37), (FX56), (FX57), (FX58), or (FX59):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof.

[036] The present invention includes therapeutic agents for biomedical applications, including phototherapy, comprising purified stereoisomers (e.g., enantiomers and diastereomers), salts (including quarternary salts), and/or ionic forms (e.g., protonated and deprotonated forms) of the compounds of any of formula (FX1 ) - (FX60), and mixtures thereof. As will be understood by those having general skill in the art, acidic functional groups and basic functional groups of the compounds of any of formula (FX1 ) - (FX60) may be in protonated or deprotonated states depending on the molecular environment (e.g., pH, ionic strength, composition, etc.), for example during synthesis, formulation and/or administration

[037] In an embodiment, the invention provides compounds of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60) wherein each of R ⁴ - R ¹¹ is independently hydrogen or a C C-io alkyl, and optionally wherein each of R ⁴ - R ¹¹ is independently hydrogen or a C-|-C ₆ alkyl, and optionally wherein each of R ⁴ - R ¹¹ is hydrogen. In an embodiment, the invention provides compounds of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60) wherein each Y ¹ is independently Bm. In an embodiment, the invention provides compounds of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60) wherein each Y ¹ is independently hydrogen. In an embodiment, the invention provides compounds of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60) wherein R ³ is -NR ⁸ H, and optionally R ² is -NR ⁸ H. In an embodiment, the invention provides compounds of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60) wherein R ³ is -NH ₂ , and optionally R ² is -NH ₂ . In an embodiment, the invention provides compounds of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX33), (FX42) - (FX55) and (FX60) wherein each of R ²⁰ - R ³⁸ is independently hydrogen or C1-C10 alkyl, optionally hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl, and optionally hydrogen.

[038] The invention further provides a compound having any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX60), or a pharmaceutical formulation thereof, for use in an optical imaging, diagnostic, and/or

phototherapeutic biomedical procedure such as a Type 1 or Type 2 phototherapy procedure. In an embodiment, the invention provides an optical agent comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable formulation, wherein at least one active ingredient of the formulation is a compound having any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX60) provided in a therapeutically effective amount. The invention includes, for example, formulations comprising a compound having any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX60) and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients. In an embodiment, the invention provides a pharmaceutically acceptable formulation for combination therapy comprising a compound having any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX60) and one or more additional diagnostic, imaging, and/or therapeutic agents, such as anti-cancer agents, anti-inflammatory agents, and/or imaging agents (e.g., optical and/or non-optical imaging agents).

[039] In an embodiment, the invention provides methods for a biomedical procedure, such as a phototherapy procedure, wherein the method comprises: (i) administering (e.g., via intravenous or intraarterial injection, oral administration, topical administration, subcutaneous administration, etc.) to a subject a therapeutically or diagnostically effective amount of the compound having any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX60) and (ii) exposing the administered compound to electromagnetic radiation. In an embodiment, the administrating step is carried out under conditions sufficient for contacting the compound with a target tissue or cell, wherein the compound selectively binds to or otherwise preferentially associates with the target tissue or cell. In an embodiment, the administered compound is exposed to electromagnetic radiation having wavelengths selected over a range of 350 nanometers to 1300 nanometers, optionally having wavelengths selected over a range of 400 nanometers to 900 nanometers. In an embodiment, exposing the administered compound to electromagnetic radiation cleaves a nitrogen=nitrogen bond of a -N ₃ group of the compound. In an embodiment, exposing the administered compound to electromagnetic radiation having wavelengths selected over the range of 350 nanometers to 1300 nanometers generates a therapeutically effective amount of nitrogen or nitrene radicals.

[040] In an embodiment, exposing the administered compound to electromagnetic radiation generates a therapeutically effective amount of photoactivated compound. In an embodiment, exposing the administered compound to electromagnetic radiation generates a therapeutically effective amount of reactive species causing localized cell death, inactivation or injury. In an embodiment, the medical phototherapy procedure comprises administering, contacting or otherwise targeting the compound to or with a target tissue of the subject, such as a tumor, lesion, site of inflammation, vasculature tissue, or organ. In an embodiment, methods of the invention further comprise exposing the administered compound at the target tissue to light having sufficient power, fluence, intensity and/or dose (net number of photons provided to the target tissue) to result in injury, inactivation and/or death to cells at the target tissue.

[041] In an embodiment, the biomedical procedure comprises administering, contacting or otherwise targeting the administered compound to or with a target tissue or cell of the subject, such as a tumor, lesion, site of inflammation, vasculature tissue, or an organ. In an embodiment, for example, the target tissue is a tissue type selected from the group consisting of breast, lung, throat, cervical, colon, kidney, stomach, ovarian, testicular, prostate, gastric, esophageal, uterine, endometrial, and pancreatic tissue. In an embodiment, exposing the administered compound to electromagnetic radiation generates fluorescence, wherein the biomedical procedure further comprises detecting fluorescence from the administered compound. In an embodiment, exposing the administered compound to electromagnetic radiation generates a diagnostically effective amount of fluorescence, for example an amount of fluorescence allowing for optical detection, visualizing and/or imaging of the target tissue. In an embodiment, a method of the invention further comprises exposing the administered compound at the target tissue to electromagnetic radiation having sufficient power, fluence, intensity and/or dose (net number of photons provided to the target tissue) to provide optical detection, visualization and/or imaging of the target tissue. In an embodiment, a method of the invention further comprises generating an image of the fluorescence from the compound. In an embodiment, a method of the invention further comprises visualizing the fluorescence from the compound.

[042] In a method, the electromagnetic radiation exposed to the compound of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60) does not have wavelengths in the X-ray region of the electromagnetic spectrum. In a method, the electromagnetic radiation exposed to the compound of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60) does not have wavelengths in the ultraviolet region of the electromagnetic spectrum. In an embodiment, non-ionizing electromagnetic radiation is used in the present methods. "Non-ionizing electromagnetic radiation" herein refers to electromagnetic radiation wherein a single photon does not have enough energy to completely remove at least one electron from an atom or molecule of the subject's body.

[043] In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound as described herein, or a pharmaceutical formulation thereof, for use in a medical phototherapy procedure, said procedure comprising: administering to a subject in need of treatment a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of any of claims 1-24; and exposing the administered compound to electromagnetic radiation. In an aspect of this embodiment, the procedure is a Type 1 phototherapy procedure. In an aspect of this embodiment, the procedure comprises exposing the administered compound to the electromagnetic radiation having wavelengths selected over a range of 350 nanometers to 1300 nanometers. In an aspect of this embodiment, exposing the administered compound to the electromagnetic radiation having wavelengths selected over the range of 350 nanometers to 1300 nanometers generates a therapeutically effective amount of nitrene or excited nitrogen. In an aspect of this embodiment, exposing the administered compound to the electromagnetic radiation generates a therapeutically effective amount of photoactivated administered compound. In an aspect of this embodiment, exposing the administered compound to the electromagnetic radiation cleaves a nitrogen-nitrogen bond of a -N ₃ group of the administered compound. In an aspect of this embodiment, exposing the administered compound to the electromagnetic radiation generates a therapeutically effective amount of reactive species causing localized cell death or injury. In an aspect of this embodiment, the procedure comprises contacting a target tissue of the subject with the administered compound. In an aspect of this embodiment, the target tissue is colon, prostate, gastric, esophageal, uterine, endometrial, pancreatic, breast, cervical, brain, skin, gallbladder, lung, throat, kidney, testicular, prostate, gastric, or ovary tissue. In an aspect of this embodiment, the target tissue is cancerous tissue. In an aspect of this embodiment, the target tissue is a tumor. In an aspect of this embodiment,

[044] In an embodiment, a compound is provided for use in treatment of cancer or a cancer- associated disorder. In an embodiment, a compound is provided wherein the cancer or cancer- associated disorder is colon cancer, prostate cancer, gastric cancer, esophageal cancer, uterine cancer, endometrial cancer, pancreatic cancer, breast cancer, cervical cancer, brain cancer, skin cancer, gallbladder cancer, lung cancer, or ovarian cancer. In an embodiment, a compound is provided for use in treatment of inflammation or an inflammation -associated disorder.

[045] In an embodiment, a pharmaceutical composition is provided comprising: a compound as described herein; and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients. In an embodiment, a pharmaceutical composition is provided comprising: a compound as described herein; and one or more additional therapeutic agents or diagnostic agents.

[046] In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being any of formula (FX50), (FX51 ), (FX52), (FX53), (FX54), or (FX55): 50

-F, _R 51 81 ,52 is -NR ⁷⁵ R ⁷⁶ , -OR ⁷⁷ , -SR ⁷⁸ or -(L)e-W-Y ¹ is -NR ⁷⁹ R ⁸⁰ -OR -SR ⁸² or -(L)e-W-Y ¹ ; R

_R 53 _ _{N R} 85 _R 86 81 ,54 is -F, -NR ⁸³ R ⁸⁴ , -OR ⁷⁷ , -SR ⁷⁸ or -(L)e-W-Y ¹ is -OR -SR ⁸² or -(L)e-W-Y ¹ ; R

-F, _R 55 81 ,56 is -NR ⁸⁷ R ⁸⁸ , -OR ⁷⁷ , -SR ⁷⁸ or -(L)e-W-Y ¹ is -NR ⁸⁹ R ⁹⁰ -OR -SR ⁸² or -(L)e-W-Y ¹ ; R

_R 57 81 ,58 is -F, -NR ⁹¹ R ⁹² , -OR ⁷⁷ , -SR ⁷⁸ or -(L)e-W-Y ¹ is -NR^R ⁹⁴ -OR -SR ⁸² or -(L)e-W-Y ¹ ; R

_R 59 81 ,60 is -F, -NR ⁹⁵ R ⁹⁶ , -OR ⁷⁷ , -SR ⁷⁸ or -(L)e-W-Y ¹ is -NR ⁹⁷ R ⁹⁸ -OR -SR ⁸² or -(L)e-W-Y ¹ ; R is -F, -NR"R -OR ⁷⁷ , -SR ⁷⁸ or -(L)e-W-Y ¹ ; R ⁶¹ is -N R ¹⁰¹ R ¹⁰² , -OR ⁸¹ , -SR ⁸² or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁷⁵ and R ⁷⁶ is independently hydrogen, C1-C20 alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂ o cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃ o aryl, C ₅ -C ₃ o heteroaryl, C C ₂ o acyl, C ₂ -C ₂ o alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁷⁹ and R ⁸⁰ is independently hydrogen, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₆ aryl, C ₈ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C-I-C-IO alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁸³ and R ⁸⁴ is independently hydrogen, C C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, Ci-C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, Ci-C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each R ⁸⁵ is independently hydrogen, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, Ci-C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C-I-C-IO alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each R ⁸⁶ is independently hydrogen, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂ o alkylaryl, C ₁ -C6 alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁸⁷ and R ⁸⁸ is independently hydrogen, Ci-C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, Ci-C ₂₀ acyl, C ₆ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂ o alkylaryl, C ₁ -C6 alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each R ⁸⁹ is independently hydrogen, C-|-C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, Ci-C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each R ⁹⁰ is independently C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂ o acyl, C ₂ -C ₅ alkenyl, C ₇ -C ₂ o alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂ o alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C1-C6 alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C1-C1 ₀ alkylenehydroxy or - (L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁹¹ and R ⁹² is independently hydrogen, C C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃ o heteroaryl, Ci-C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, Ci-C ₆

alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e - W-Y ¹ ; each R ⁹³ is independently hydrogen, Ci-C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each R ⁹⁴ is independently Ci-C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, Ci-C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C1-C1 ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁹⁵ to R ¹⁰² is independently hydrogen, C C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂ o alkylaryl, C1-C6 alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C C ₁₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁷¹ to R ⁷⁴ , R ⁷⁷ , R ⁷⁸ , R ⁸¹ , R ⁸² is independently hydrogen, Ci-C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, Ci-C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C1-C1 ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each Y ¹ is independently hydrogen, FL or Bm; each L is independently C C ₁₀ alkylene, C ₃ -C ₁₀ cycloalkylene, C ₅ -C ₃₀ arylene, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroarylene, C ₂ -Ci ₀ alkenylene, C ₃ -Ci ₀ cycloalkenylene, C ₂ -Ci ₀ alkynylene, ethenylene, ethynylene, phenylene, 1 -aza-2,5-dioxocyclopentylene, -(CH ₂ CH ₂ 0) _a -, -(CHOH) -, - (CH ₂ ) _n (CH ₂ CH ₂ 0)a-, -(CH ₂ ) _n (CHOH) _b -, or 1 ,4-diazacyclohexylene; each W is independently a single bond, -(CH ₂ ) _n - -(HCCH) _m - -0-, -S-, -SO-, -S0 ₂ - -S0 ₃ -, -OS0 ₂ -, -NR ²⁰ -, -CO-, - COO-, -OCO-, -OCOO-, -CONR ²¹ -, -NR ²² CO- -OCONR ²³ -, -NR ²⁴ COO-, -NR ²⁵ CONR ²⁶ -, - NR ²⁷ CSNR ²⁸ -, -0(CH ₂ ) _n -, -S(CH ₂ ) _n -, -NR ²⁹ (CH ₂ ) _n -, -CO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -COO(CH ₂ ) _n - -OCO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -OCOO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -CONR ³⁰ (CH ₂ ) _n -, -NR ³¹ CO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -OCONR ³² (CH ₂ ) _n - -NR ³³ COO(CH ₂ ) _n -, - -NR ³⁶ CSNR ³⁷ (CH ₂ ) _n -, or -0(CH ₂ ) _n NR ³⁸ CO(CH ₂ ) _n -; each of R ²⁰ - R ³⁸ is independently hydrogen, C C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ heteroaryl, or C ₅ -C ₂₀ aryl; each FL is independently a dye group corresponding to a pyrazine, a thiazole, a phenylxanthene, a phenothiazine, a phenoselenazine, a cyanine, an indocyanine, a squaraine, a dipyrrolo

pyrimidone, an anthraquinone, a tetracene, a quinoline, an acridine, an acridone, a

phenanthridine, an azo dye, a rhodamine, a phenoxazine, an azulene, an aza-azulene, a triphenyl methane dye, an indole, a benzoindole, an indocarbocyanine, a Nile Red dye, or a

benzoindocarbocyanine; each Bm is independently an amino acid, a peptide, a protein, a nucleoside, a nucleotide, an enzyme, a carbohydrate, a glycomimetic, an oligomer, a lipid, a polymer, an antibody, an antibody fragment, a mono- or polysaccharide comprising 1 to 50 carbohydrate units, a glycopeptide, a glycoprotein, a peptidomimetic, a drug, a steroid, a hormone, an aptamer, a receptor, a metal chelating agent, a polynucleotide comprising 2 to 50 nucleic acid units, or a polypeptide comprising 2 to 30 amino acid units; each of a and b is independently an integer selected from the range of 1 to 100; each e is independently 0 or 1 ; and each of m and n is independently an integer selected from the range of 1 to 1 0; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof. In an embodiment, each of R ⁵⁰ , R ⁵² , R ⁵⁴ , R ⁵⁶ , R ⁵⁸ , and R ⁶⁰ is independently a substituent other than -F. In a further embodiment, each of R ⁵⁰ , R ⁵² , R ⁵⁴ , R ⁵⁶ , R ⁵⁸ , and R ⁶⁰ is -F. In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX50):

(FX50); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof, where R and

75 _D 76 _D 79 are as described in the context of (FX50)-(FX55), and wherein at least one of R , R , R and

R is independently C-I-C-IO alkylenehydroxy.

[047] In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX52):

(FX52); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof; where R and

R are as described in the context of (FX50)-(FX55), and wherein at least one of R , R R ⁸⁹ and R ⁹⁰ is independently CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy. In an embodiment the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX50):

(FX50); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof, where R and

75 ₃ 76 r-,79 are as described in the context of (FX50)-(FX55), and wherein at least one of R , R , R and

R is independently C1-C6 alkylenecarboxy. In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX52):

(FX52); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof; where R and R ^ss are as described in the context of (FX50)-(FX55), and wherein at least one of R ⁸⁷ , R ⁸⁸ , R ⁸⁹ and R ⁹⁰ is independently C-|-C ₆ alkylenecarboxy. [048] In an embodiment the invention provides a compound of formula (FX50), (FX51 ), (FX52),

75.-, 76 ₃ 79|-,80 >52 -,83,-, 84 53

(FX53), (FX54), or (FX55) wherein R ⁵⁰ is -NR'°R'°, R°' is— NR' ^M R ^0U , is -NR ^0J R ⁰⁴ , R ^0J is -

_{N R} 85 _R 86 _R 54 _is _ _{N R} 87 _R 88 _R 55 _jg _ _{N R} 89 _R 90 _R 56 _jg _ _{N R} 91 _R 92 _R 57 _jg _ _{N R} 93 _R 94_ _R 58 _jg _ _{N R} 95 _R 96 _R 59 is -NR ⁹⁷ R ⁹⁸ , R ⁶⁰ is -NR ⁹⁹ R ¹⁰⁰ , or R ⁶¹ is -NR ¹⁰¹ R ¹⁰² . In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX50). In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX51 ). In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX52). In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX53). In an

embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX54). In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX55).

[049] In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being any of formula (FX34), (FX35), (FX36), (FX37), (FX38), (FX39), (FX40), (FX41 ), (FX56), (FX57), (FX58), or (FX59):

(FX36),

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof.

[050] In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being any of formula (FX50), (FX51), (FX52), (FX53), (FX54), or (FX55):

52),

(FX55): wherein: R ⁵⁰ is -F, -NR ⁷⁵ R ⁷⁶ , -OR ⁷⁷ , -SR ⁷⁸ or-(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; R ⁵¹ is -NR ⁷⁹ R ⁸⁰ , -OR ⁸¹ , -SR ⁸² or-(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; R ⁵² is -F, -NR ⁸³ R ⁸⁴ , -OR ⁷⁷ , -SR ⁷⁸ or-(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; R ⁵³ is -NR ⁸⁵ R ⁸⁶ , -OR ⁸¹ , -SR ⁸² or-(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; R ⁵⁴ is -F, -NR ⁸⁷ R ⁸⁸ , -OR ⁷⁷ , -SR ⁷⁸ or-(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; R ⁵⁵ is -NR ⁸⁹ R ⁹⁰ , -OR ⁸¹ , -SR ⁸² or-(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; R ⁵⁶ is -F, -NR ⁹¹ R ⁹² , -OR ⁷⁷ , -SR ⁷⁸ or-(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; R ⁵⁷ is -NR^R ⁹⁴ , -OR ⁸¹ , -SR ⁸² or-(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; R ⁵⁸ is -F, -NR ⁹⁵ R ⁹⁶ , -OR ⁷⁷ , -SR ⁷⁸ or-(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; R ⁵⁹ is -NR ⁹⁷ R ⁹⁸ , -OR ⁸¹ , -SR ⁸² or-(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; R ⁶⁰ is _F, -NR"R ¹⁰⁰ , -OR ⁷⁷ , -SR ⁷⁸ or-(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; R ⁶¹ is -NR ¹⁰¹ R ¹⁰² , -OR ⁸¹ , -SR ⁸² or-(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁷⁵ and R ⁷⁶ is independently hydrogen, C C ₂ o alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂ o cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂ o acyl, C ₂ -C ₂ o alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂ o alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C1-C1 ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁷⁹ and R ⁸⁰ is independently hydrogen, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₆ aryl, C ₈ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, Ci-C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C ₃ -C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C C ₂ alkylenehydroxy, C ₄ -C ₀ alkylenehydroxy or - (L)e-W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁸³ and R ⁸⁴ is independently hydrogen, C C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e - W-Y ¹ ; each R ⁸⁵ is independently hydrogen, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C1-C1 ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each R ⁸⁶ is independently hydrogen, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, Ci-C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁸⁷ and R ⁸⁸ is independently hydrogen, Ci-C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, Ci-C ₂₀ acyl, C ₆ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C1-C1 ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each R ⁸⁹ is independently hydrogen, C C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂ o alkylaryl, C1-C6 alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each R ⁹⁰ is independently C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ - C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, Ci-C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₅ alkenyl, C ₇ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂ o alkylaryl, C1-C6 alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, d- C-io alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁹¹ and R ⁹² is independently hydrogen, C-|-C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, Ci-C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀

alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each R ⁹³ is independently hydrogen, Ci-C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C1-C6 alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C1-C1 ₀

alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each R ⁹⁴ is independently C C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, Ci-C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, Ci-C ₆

alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e - W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁹⁵ to R ¹⁰² is independently hydrogen, C C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆

alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C1-C1 ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e - W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁷¹ to R ⁷⁴ , R ⁷⁷ , R ⁷⁸ , R ⁸¹ , and R ⁸² is independently hydrogen, C C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C1-C6 alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C1-C1 ₀

alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each Y ¹ is independently hydrogen, FL or Bm; each L is independently C1-C10 alkylene, C ₃ -Ci ₀ cycloalkylene, C ₅ -C ₃₀ arylene, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroarylene, C ₂ -Ci ₀ alkenylene, C ₃ -C ₀ cycloalkenylene, C ₂ -C ₀ alkynylene, ethenylene, ethynylene, phenylene, 1 -aza- 2,5-dioxocyclopentylene, -(CH ₂ CH ₂ 0) _a -, -(CHOH) _b -, -(CH ₂ )n(CH2CH ₂ 0) _a -, -(CH ₂ ) _n (CHOH) _b -, or 1 ,4-diazacyclohexylene; each W is independently a single bond, -(CH ₂ ) _n - -(HCCH) _m - -0-, -S-, -SO-, -S0 ₂ - -SO ₃ -, -OS0 ₂ -, -NR ²⁰ -, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -OCOO-, -CONR ²¹ -, - NR ²² CO-, -OCONR ²³ -, -NR ²⁴ COO-, -NR ²⁵ CONR ²⁶ -, -NR ²⁷ CSNR ²⁸ -, -0(CH ₂ ) _n -, -S(CH ₂ ) _n -, - NR ²⁹ (CH ₂ )n- -CO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -COO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -OCO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -OCOO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -CONR ³⁰ (CH ₂ ) _n - - NR ³¹ CO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -OCONR ³² (CH ₂ ) _n -, -NR ³³ COO(CH ₂ ) _n -, - NR ³⁶ CSNR ³⁷ (CH ₂ ) _n -, -0(CH ₂ ) _n NR ³⁸ CO(CH ₂ ) _n -; each of R ²⁰ - R ³⁸ is independently hydrogen, C C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ heteroaryl, or C ₅ -C ₂₀ aryl; each FL is independently a dye group corresponding to a pyrazine, a thiazole, a phenylxanthene, a phenothiazine, a phenoselenazine, a cyanine, an indocyanine, a squaraine, a dipyrrolo pyrimidone, an anthraquinone, a tetracene, a quinoline, an acridine, an acridone, a phenanthridine, an azo dye, a rhodamine, a phenoxazine, an azulene, an aza-azulene, a triphenyl methane dye, an indole, a benzoindole, an indocarbocyanine, a Nile Red dye, or a benzoindocarbocyanine; each Bm is independently an amino acid, a peptide, a protein, a nucleoside, a nucleotide, an enzyme, a carbohydrate, a glycomimetic, an oligomer, a lipid, a polymer, an antibody, an antibody fragment, a mono- or polysaccharide comprising 1 to 50 carbohydrate units, a glycopeptide, a glycoprotein, a peptidomimetic, a drug, a steroid, a hormone, an aptamer, a receptor, a metal chelating agent, a mono- or polynucleotide comprising 1 to 50 nucleic acid units, or a polypeptide comprising 2 to 6 or 8 to 30 amino acid units; each of a and b is independently an integer selected from the range of 1 to 100; each of a and b is independently an integer selected from the range of 1 to 100; each e is independently 0 or 1 ; and each of m and n is independently an integer selected from the range of 1 to 10; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof. In an embodiment, each of R ⁵⁰ , R ⁵² , R ⁵⁴ , R ⁵⁶ , R ⁵⁸ , and R ⁶⁰ is independently a substituent other than -F. In a further embodiment, each of R ⁵⁰ , R ⁵² , R ⁵⁴ , R ⁵⁶ , R ⁵⁸ , and R ⁶⁰ is -F. In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX50):

(FX50); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof, where R and

R are as described in the context of (FX50)-(FX55), and wherein at least one of R , R , R and R ⁸⁰ is independently C1-C1 ₀ alkylenehydroxy.

[051 ] In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX52): (FX52); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof; where R and

-, 89

R are as described in the context of (FX50)-(FX55), and wherein at least one of R , R

R ⁹⁰ is independently C ₁ -C ₁₀ alkylenehydroxy. In an embodiment the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX50):

(FX50); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof, where R and R ³ ' are as described in the context of (FX50)-(FX55), and wherein at least one of R ⁷⁵ , R ⁷⁶ , R ⁷⁹ and R ⁸⁰ is independently CrC ₀ alkylenecarboxy. In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX52):

(FX52); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof; where R and

87 _D 88 -, 89 are as described in the context of (FX50)-(FX55), and wherein at least one of R , R , R and

R is independently C-I-C-IO alkylenecarboxy.

[052] In an embodiment the invention provides a compound of formula (FX50), (FX51 ), (FX52),

erein R ⁵⁰ is -NR 7'5°.R-, 7'6°, R°' is ₃ 79|-,80 >52 -,83,-, 84 53

(FX53), (FX54), or (FX55) wh — NR' ^M R ^0U , is -NR ^0J R ⁰⁴ , R ^0J is -

_{N R} 85 _R 86 _R 54 _is _ _{N R} 87 _R 88 _R 55 _jg _ _{N R} 89 _R 90 _R 56 _jg _ _{N R} 91 _R 92 _R 57 _jg _ _{N R} 93 _R 94_ _R 58 _jg _ _{N R} 95 _R 96 _R 59 is -NR ⁹⁷ R ⁹⁸ , R ⁶⁰ is -NR ⁹⁹ R ¹⁰⁰ , or R ⁶¹ is -NR ¹⁰¹ R ¹⁰² . In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX50). In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX51 ). In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX52). In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX53). In an

embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX54). In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being of formula (FX55).

[053] In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound being any of formula (FX37), (FX56), (FX57), or (FX58):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof.

[054] Without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, there can be discussion herein of beliefs or understandings of underlying principles or mechanisms relating to the invention. It is recognized that regardless of the ultimate correctness of any explanation or hypothesis, an embodiment of the invention can nonetheless be operative and useful.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

[055] Figures 1A - 1 D provide schematic representations of reaction mechanisms for azide optical agents, wherein photoactivation generates reactive species and cell death. Figures 1A and 1 B provide schematic representations of reaction mechanisms for phototherapeutic agents comprising an azide compound having formula (FX1 ) and Figures 1A and 1 B provide schematic representations of reaction mechanisms for phototherapeutic agents comprising a azide compound having formula (FX37).

[056] Figure 2 provides cell viability results for U397 leukemia cells exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX34).

[057] Figure 3 provides cell viability results for U397 leukemia cells exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX36). [058] Figure 4 provides cell viability results for U397 leukemia cells exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX35).

[059] Figure 5 provides cell viability results for U397 leukemia cells exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX37).

[060] Figure 6 provides cell viability results for control conditions (no photosensitzer, DMSO and Light) wherein cells were exposed to light in presence of dimethyl sulfoxide.

[061] Figure 7 provides general schemes for the syntheses of bioconjugates of azide optical agents having formula (FX1 ).

[062] Figures 8A and 8B provide examples of coupling reactions useful for synthesis of azide optical agents of the invention having specific targeting ligands.

[063] Figure 9 provides general schemes for the synthesis of substituted phenyl azide compounds with a substituted benzene precursor.

[064] Figure 10 provides cell viability results comparing U397 leukemia cells exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX36) and U397 leukemia cells exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX41 ).

[065] Figure 11 provides cell viability results for (A) HCT1 16 cells exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX37), (B) KB cells exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX37), and (C) HT29 cells exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX37).

[066] Figure 12 provides flow cytometry results for exposure of HCT1 16 cells to (A) the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX36) at a concentration of 25 μΜ and light for 10 minutes; (B) the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX36) at a concentration of 6 μΜ and light for 10 minutes; (C) the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX36) at a concentration of 25 μΜ and light for 20 minutes; and (D) the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX36) at a concentration of 6 μΜ and light for 10 minutes.

STATEMENTS REGARDING CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS AND NOMENCLATURE

[067] In an embodiment, a composition or compound of the invention is isolated or purified. In an embodiment, an isolated or purified compound is at least partially isolated or purified as would be understood in the art. In an embodiment, the composition or compound of the invention has a chemical purity of 95%, optionally for some applications 99%, optionally for some applications 99.9%, optionally for some applications 99.99%, and optionally for some applications 99.999% pure.

[068] Many of the molecules disclosed herein contain one or more ionizable groups, lonizable groups include groups from which a proton can be removed (e.g., -COOH) or added (e.g., amines) and groups which can be quaternized (e.g., amines). All possible ionic forms of such molecules and salts thereof are intended to be included individually in the disclosure herein. With regard to salts of the compounds herein, one of ordinary skill in the art can select from among a wide variety of available counterions that are appropriate for preparation of salts of this invention for a given application. In specific applications, the selection of a given anion or cation for preparation of a salt can result in increased or decreased solubility of that salt.

[069] The compounds of this invention can contain one or more chiral centers. Accordingly, this invention is intended to include racemic mixtures, diasteromers, enantiomers, tautomers and mixtures enriched in one or more stereoisomer. The scope of the invention as described and claimed encompasses the racemic forms of the compounds as well as the individual enantiomers and non-racemic mixtures thereof.

[070] As used herein, the term "group" may refer to a functional group of a chemical compound. Groups of the present compounds refer to an atom or a collection of atoms that are a part of the compound. Groups of the present invention may be attached to other atoms of the compound via one or more covalent bonds. Groups may also be characterized with respect to their valence state. The present invention includes groups characterized as monovalent, divalent, trivalent, etc. valence states.

[071] As used herein, the term "substituted" refers to a compound wherein a hydrogen is replaced by another functional group.

[072] As is customary and well known in the art, hydrogen atoms in formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60) are not always explicitly shown, for example, hydrogen atoms bonded to the carbon atoms of aromatic, heteroaromatic, and alicyclic rings are not always explicitly shown in formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60). The structures provided herein, for example in the context of the description of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60), are intended to convey to one of reasonable skill in the art the chemical composition of compounds of the methods and compositions of the invention, and as will be understood by one of skill in the art, the structures provided do not indicate the specific positions of atoms and bond angles between atoms of these compounds.

[073] As used herein, the terms "alkylene" and "alkylene group" are used synonymously and refer to a divalent group derived from an alkyl group as defined herein. The invention includes compounds having one or more alkylene groups. Alkylene groups in some compounds function as attaching and/or spacer groups. Compounds of the invention may have substituted and/or unsubstituted C C ₂ o alkylene, C C ₁₀ alkylene and C C ₅ alkylene groups. Substituted alkylene groups of the invention include those substituted with one or more aryl, carboxy, halo, or hydroxyl groups, among others.

[074] As used herein, the terms "cycloalkylene" and "cycloalkylene group" are used

synonymously and refer to a divalent group derived from a cycloalkyi group as defined herein. The invention includes compounds having one or more cycloalkylene groups. Cycloalkyi groups in some compounds function as attaching and/or spacer groups. Compounds of the invention may have substituted and/or unsubstituted C ₃ -C ₂ o cycloalkylene, C ₃ -C ₁₀ cycloalkylene and C ₃ -C ₅ cycloalkylene groups.

[075] As used herein, the terms "arylene" and "arylene group" are used synonymously and refer to a divalent group derived from an aryl group as defined herein. The invention includes compounds having one or more arylene groups. In some embodiments, an arylene is a divalent group derived from an aryl group by removal of hydrogen atoms from two intra-ring carbon atoms of an aromatic ring of the aryl group. Arylene groups in some compounds function as attaching and/or spacer groups. Arylene groups in some compounds function as chromophore, fluorophore, aromatic antenna, dye and/or imaging groups. Compounds of the invention include substituted and/or unsubstituted C ₃ -C ₃₀ arylene, C ₃ -C ₂ o arylene, C ₃ -C ₁₀ arylene and C C ₅ arylene groups.

[076] As used herein, the terms "heteroarylene" and "heteroarylene group" are used

synonymously and refer to a divalent group derived from a heteroaryl group as defined herein. The invention includes compounds having one or more heteroarylene groups. In some embodiments, a heteroarylene is a divalent group derived from a heteroaryl group by removal of hydrogen atoms from two intra-ring carbon atoms or intra-ring nitrogen atoms of a heteroaromatic or aromatic ring of the heteroaryl group. Heteroarylene groups in some compounds function as attaching and/or spacer groups. Heteroarylene groups in some compounds function as chromophore, aromatic antenna, fluorophore, dye and/or imaging groups. Compounds of the invention include substituted and/or unsubstituted C ₃ -C ₃₀ heteroarylene, C ₃ -C ₂ o heteroarylene, C-I-C-IO heteroarylene and C ₃ -C ₅ heteroarylene groups.

[077] As used herein, the terms "alkenylene" and "alkenylene group" are used synonymously and refer to a divalent group derived from an alkenyl group as defined herein. The invention includes compounds having one or more alkenylene groups. Alkenylene groups in some compounds function as attaching and/or spacer groups. Compounds of the invention include substituted and/or unsubstituted C ₂ -C ₂ o alkenylene, C ₂ -C ₁₀ alkenylene and C ₂ -C ₅ alkenylene groups.

[078] As used herein, the terms "cylcoalkenylene" and "cylcoalkenylene group" are used synonymously and refer to a divalent group derived from a cylcoalkenyl group as defined herein. The invention includes compounds having one or more cylcoalkenylene groups. Cycloalkenylene groups in some compounds function as attaching and/or spacer groups. Compounds of the invention include substituted and/or unsubstituted C ₃ -C ₂₀ cylcoalkenylene, C ₃ -C ₀ cylcoalkenylene and C ₃ -C ₅ cylcoalkenylene groups.

[079] As used herein, the terms "alkynylene" and "alkynylene group" are used synonymously and refer to a divalent group derived from an alkynyl group as defined herein. . The invention includes compounds having one or more alkynylene groups. Alkynylene groups in some compounds function as attaching and/or spacer groups. Compounds of the invention include substituted and/or unsubstituted C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynylene, C ₂ -Ci ₀ alkynylene and C ₂ -C ₅ alkynylene groups. [080] As used herein, the term "halo" refers to a halogen group such as a fluoro (-F), chloro (-CI), bromo (-Br), iodo (-1) or astato (-At).

[081] The term "heterocyclic" refers to ring structures containing at least one other kind of atom, in addition to carbon, in the ring. Examples of such heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Heterocyclic rings include heterocyclic alicyclic rings and heterocyclic aromatic rings.

Examples of heterocyclic rings include, but are not limited to, pyrrolidinyl, piperidyl, imidazolidinyl, tetrahydrofuryl, tetrahydrothienyl, furyl, thienyl, pyridyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, indolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridinyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, triazolyl and tetrazolyl groups. Atoms of heterocyclic rings can be bonded to a wide range of other atoms and functional groups, for example, provided as substituents.

[082] The term "carbocyclic" refers to ring structures containing only carbon atoms in the ring. Carbon atoms of carbocyclic rings can be bonded to a wide range of other atoms and functional groups, for example, provided as substituents..

[083] The term "alicyclic ring" refers to a ring, or plurality of fused rings, that is not an aromatic ring. Alicyclic rings include both carbocyclic and heterocyclic rings.

[084] The term "aromatic ring" refers to a ring, or a plurality of fused rings, that includes at least one aromatic ring. The term aromatic ring includes aromatic rings comprising carbon, hydrogen and heteroatoms. Aromatic ring includes carbocyclic and heterocyclic aromatic rings. Aromatic rings are components of aryl groups.

[085] The term "fused ring" or "fused ring structure" refers to a plurality of alicyclic and/or aromatic rings provided in a fused ring configuration, such as fused rings that share at least two intra ring carbon atoms and/or heteroatoms.

[086] As used herein, the term "alkoxyalkyl" refers to a substituent of the formula alkyl-O-alkyl.

[087] As used herein, the term "polyhydroxyalkyl" refers to a substituent having from 2 to 12 carbon atoms and from 2 to 5 hydroxyl groups, such as the 2,3-dihydroxypropyl, 2,3,4- trihydroxybutyl or 2,3,4, 5-tetrahydroxypentyl residue.

[088] As used herein, the term "polyalkoxyalkyl" refers to a substituent of the formula alkyl- (alkoxy) _n -alkoxy wherein n is an integer from 1 to 10, preferably 1 to 4, and more preferably for some embodiments 1 to 3.

[089] Amino acids, with common abbreviations in parenthesis, include glycine (Gly, G), alanine (Ala, A), valine (Val, V), leucine (Leu, L), isoleucine (lie, I), methionine (Met, M), proline (Pro, P), phenylalanine (Phe, F), tryptophan (Trp, W), asparagine (Asn, N), glutamine (Gin, Q), serine (Ser, S), threonine (Thr, T), tyrosine (Tyr, Y), cysteine (Cys, C), lysine (Lys, K), arginine (Arg, R), histidine (His, H), aspartic acid (Asp, D), and glutamic acid (Glu, E). As used herein, reference to "a side chain residue of a natural a-amino acid" specifically includes the side chains of the above- referenced amino acids.

[090] AlkyI groups include straight-chain, branched and cyclic alkyl groups. AlkyI groups include those having from 1 to 30 carbon atoms. Alkyl groups include small alkyl groups having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Alkyl groups include medium length alkyl groups having from 4-10 carbon atoms. Alkyl groups include long alkyl groups having more than 10 carbon atoms, particularly those having 10-30 carbon atoms. The term cycloalkyl specifically refers to an alky group having a ring structure such as ring structure comprising 3-30 carbon atoms, optionally 3-20 carbon atoms and optionally 2 - 10 carbon atoms, including an alkyl group having one or more rings. Cycloalkyl groups include those having a 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7-, 8-, 9- or 10-member carbon ring(s) and particularly those having a 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, or 7-member ring(s). The carbon rings in cycloalkyl groups can also carry alkyl groups. Cycloalkyl groups can include bicyclic and tricycloalkyi groups. Alkyl groups are optionally substituted. Substituted alkyl groups include among others those which are substituted with aryl groups, which in turn can be optionally substituted. Specific alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, cyclopropyl, n-butyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, cyclobutyl, n-pentyl, branched- pentyl, cyclopentyl, n-hexyl, branched hexyl, and cyclohexyl groups, all of which are optionally substituted. Substituted alkyl groups include fully halogenated or semihalogenated alkyl groups, such as alkyl groups having one or more hydrogens replaced with one or more fluorine atoms, chlorine atoms, bromine atoms and/or iodine atoms. Substituted alkyl groups include fully fluorinated or semifluorinated alkyl groups, such as alkyl groups having one or more hydrogens replaced with one or more fluorine atoms. An alkoxy group is an alkyl group that has been modified by linkage to oxygen and can be represented by the formula R-0 and can also be referred to as an alkyl ether group. Examples of alkoxy groups include, but are not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy and heptoxy. Alkoxy groups include substituted alkoxy groups wherein the alky portion of the groups is substituted as provided herein in connection with the description of alkyl groups. As used herein -OMe refers to -OCH ₃ and -Me refers to -CH ₃ .

[091 ] Alkenyl groups include straight-chain, branched and cyclic alkenyl groups. Alkenyl groups include those having 1 , 2 or more double bonds and those in which two or more of the double bonds are conjugated double bonds. Alkenyl groups include those having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms. Alkenyl groups include small alkenyl groups having 2 to 3 carbon atoms. Alkenyl groups include medium length alkenyl groups having from 4-10 carbon atoms. Alkenyl groups include long alkenyl groups having more than 10 carbon atoms, particularly those having 10-20 carbon atoms. Cycloalkenyl groups include those in which a double bond is in the ring or in an alkenyl group attached to a ring. The term cycloalkenyl specifically refers to an alkenyl group having a ring structure, including an alkenyl group having a 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7-, 8-, 9- or 10-member carbon ring(s) and particularly those having a 3-, 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-member ring(s). The carbon rings in

cycloalkenylgroups can also carry alkyl groups. Cycloalkenylgroups can include bicyclic and tricyclic alkenyl groups. Alkenyl groups are optionally substituted. Substituted alkenyl groups include among others those which are substituted with alkyl or aryl groups, which groups in turn can be optionally substituted. Specific alkenyl groups include ethenyl, prop-1 -enyl, prop-2-enyl, cycloprop-1 -enyl, but-1 -enyl, but-2-enyl, cyclobut-1 -enyl, cyclobut-2-enyl, pent-1 -enyl, pent-2-enyl, branched pentenyl, cyclopent-1 -enyl, hex-1 -enyl, branched hexenyl, cyclohexenyl, all of which are optionally substituted. Substituted alkenyl groups include fully halogenated or semihalogenated alkenyl groups, such as alkenyl groups having one or more hydrogens replaced with one or more fluorine atoms, chlorine atoms, bromine atoms and/or iodine atoms. Substituted alkenyl groups include fully fluorinated or semifluorinated alkenyl groups, such as alkenyl groups having one or more hydrogen atoms replaced with one or more fluorine atoms.

[092] Aryl groups include groups having one or more 5-, 6- or 7- member aromatic rings, including heterocyclic aromatic rings. The term heteroaryl specifically refers to aryl groups having at least one 5-, 6- or 7- member heterocyclic aromatic rings. Aryl groups can contain one or more fused aromatic rings, including one or more fused heteroaromatic rings, and/or a combination of one or more aromatic rings and one or more nonaromatic rings that may be fused or linked via covalent bonds. Heterocyclic aromatic rings can include one or more N, O, or S atoms in the ring. Heterocyclic aromatic rings can include those with one, two or three N atoms, those with one or two O atoms, and those with one or two S atoms, or combinations of one or two or three N, O or S atoms. Aryl groups are optionally substituted. Substituted aryl groups include among others those which are substituted with alkyl or alkenyl groups, which groups in turn can be optionally substituted. Specific aryl groups include phenyl, biphenyl groups, pyrrolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, tetrahydrofuryl, tetrahydrothienyl, furyl, thienyl, pyridyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, indolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridinyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, and naphthyl groups, all of which are optionally substituted. Substituted aryl groups include fully halogenated or semihalogenated aryl groups, such as aryl groups having one or more hydrogens replaced with one or more fluorine atoms, chlorine atoms, bromine atoms and/or iodine atoms. Substituted aryl groups include fully fluorinated or semifluorinated aryl groups, such as aryl groups having one or more hydrogens replaced with one or more fluorine atoms. Aryl groups include, but are not limited to, aromatic group-containing or heterocylic aromatic group-containing groups corresponding to any one of the following: benzene, naphthalene, naphthoquinone,

diphenylmethane, fluorene, anthracene, anthraquinone, phenanthrene, tetracene, tetracenedione, pyridine, quinoline, isoquinoline, indoles, isoindole, pyrrole, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, pyrazole, pyrazine, pyrimidine, purine, benzimidazole, furans, benzofuran, dibenzofuran, carbazole, acridine, acridone, phenanthridine, thiophene, benzothiophene, dibenzothiophene, xanthene, xanthone, flavone, coumarin, azulene or anthracycline. As used herein, a group corresponding to the groups listed above expressly includes an aromatic or heterocyclic aromatic group, including monovalent, divalent and polyvalent groups, of the aromatic and heterocyclic aromatic groups listed herein are provided in a covalently bonded configuration in the compounds of the invention at any suitable point of attachment. In embodiments, aryl groups contain between 5 and 30 carbon atoms. In embodiments, aryl groups contain one aromatic or heteroaromatic six-membered ring and one or more additional five- or six-membered aromatic or heteroaromatic ring. In embodiments, aryl groups contain between five and eighteen carbon atoms in the rings. Aryl groups optionally have one or more aromatic rings or heterocyclic aromatic rings having one or more electron donating groups, electron withdrawing groups and/or targeting ligands provided as substituents.

[093] Arylalkyl groups are alkyl groups substituted with one or more aryl groups wherein the alkyl groups optionally carry additional substituents and the aryl groups are optionally substituted.

Specific alkylaryl groups are phenyl-substituted alkyl groups, e.g., phenylmethyl groups. Alkylaryl groups are alternatively described as aryl groups substituted with one or more alkyl groups wherein the alkyl groups optionally carry additional substituents and the aryl groups are optionally substituted. Specific alkylaryl groups are alkyl-substituted phenyl groups such as methylphenyl. Substituted arylalkyl groups include fully halogenated or semihalogenated arylalkyl groups, such as arylalkyl groups having one or more alkyl and/or aryl groups having one or more hydrogens replaced with one or more fluorine atoms, chlorine atoms, bromine atoms and/or iodine atoms.

[094] As to any of the groups described herein which contain one or more substituents, it is understood that such groups do not contain any substitution or substitution patterns which are sterically impractical and/or synthetically non-feasible. In addition, the compounds of this invention include all stereochemical isomers arising from the substitution of these compounds. Optional substitution of alkyl groups includes substitution with one or more alkenyl groups, aryl groups or both, wherein the alkenyl groups or aryl groups are optionally substituted. Optional substitution of alkenyl groups includes substitution with one or more alkyl groups, aryl groups, or both, wherein the alkyl groups or aryl groups are optionally substituted. Optional substitution of aryl groups includes substitution of the aryl ring with one or more alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, or both, wherein the alkyl groups or alkenyl groups are optionally substituted.

[095] Optional substituents for any alkyl, alkenyl and aryl group includes substitution with one or more of the following substituents, among others:

halogen, including fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine;

pseudohalides, including -CN;

[096] -COOR where R is a hydrogen or an alkyl group or an aryl group and more specifically where R is a methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, or phenyl group all of which groups are optionally substituted;

[097] -COR where R is a hydrogen or an alkyl group or an aryl group and more specifically where R is a methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, or phenyl group all of which groups are optionally substituted;

[098] -CON(R) ₂ where each R, independently of each other R, is a hydrogen or an alkyl group or an aryl group and more specifically where R is a methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, or phenyl group all of which groups are optionally substituted; and where R and R can form a ring which can contain one or more double bonds and can contain one or more additional carbon atoms;

[099] -OCON(R) ₂ where each R, independently of each other R, is a hydrogen or an alkyl group or an aryl group and more specifically where R is a methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, or phenyl group all of which groups are optionally substituted; and where R and R can form a ring which can contain one or more double bonds and can contain one or more additional carbon atoms;

[0100] -N(R) ₂ where each R, independently of each other R, is a hydrogen, or an alkyl group, or an acyl group or an aryl group and more specifically where R is a methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, phenyl or acetyl group, all of which are optionally substituted; and where R and R can form a ring which can contain one or more double bonds and can contain one or more additional carbon atoms;

[0101] -SR, where R is hydrogen or an alkyl group or an aryl group and more specifically where R is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, or a phenyl group, which are optionally substituted;

[0102] -SO ₂ R, or -SOR where R is an alkyl group or an aryl group and more specifically where R is a methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, or phenyl group, all of which are optionally substituted;

[0103] -OCOOR where R is an alkyl group or an aryl group;

[0104] -S0 ₂ N(R) ₂ where each R, independently of each other R, is a hydrogen, or an alkyl group, or an aryl group all of which are optionally substituted and wherein R and R can form a ring which can contain one or more double bonds and can contain one or more additional carbon atoms;

[0105] -OR where R is H, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group all of which are optionally substituted. In a particular example R can be an acyl yielding -OCOR" where R" is a hydrogen or an alkyl group or an aryl group and more specifically where R" is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, or phenyl groups all of which groups are optionally substituted.

[0106] Specific substituted alkyl groups include haloalkyl groups, particularly trihalomethyl groups and specifically trifluoromethyl groups. Specific substituted aryl groups include mono-, di-, tri, tetra- and pentahalo-substituted phenyl groups; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra-, penta-, hexa-, and hepta- halo-substituted naphthalene groups; 3- or 4-halo-substituted phenyl groups, 3- or 4-alkyl- substituted phenyl groups, 3- or 4-alkoxy-substituted phenyl groups, 3- or 4-RCO-substituted phenyl, 5- or 6-halo-substituted naphthalene groups. More specifically, substituted aryl groups include acetylphenyl groups, particularly 4-acetylphenyl groups; fluorophenyl groups, particularly 3-fluorophenyl and 4-fluorophenyl groups; chlorophenyl groups, particularly 3-chlorophenyl and 4- chlorophenyl groups; methylphenyl groups, particularly 4-methylphenyl groups; and

methoxyphenyl groups, particularly 4-methoxyphenyl groups. [0107] As to any of the above groups which contain one or more substituents, it is understood that such groups do not contain any substitution or substitution patterns which are sterically impractical and/or synthetically non-feasible. In addition, the compounds of this invention include all stereochemical isomers arising from the substitution of these compounds.

[0108] Pharmaceutically acceptable salts comprise pharmaceutically-acceptable anions and/or cations. As used herein, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" can refer to acid addition salts or base addition salts of the compounds in the present disclosure. A pharmaceutically acceptable salt is any salt which retains at least a portion of the activity of the parent compound and does not impart significant deleterious or undesirable effect on a subject to whom it is administered and in the context in which it is administered. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include metal complexes and salts of both inorganic and organic acids. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include metal salts such as aluminum, calcium, iron, magnesium, manganese and complex salts. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, acid salts such as acetic, aspartic, alkylsulfonic, arylsulfonic, axetil, benzenesulfonic, benzoic, bicarbonic, bisulfuric, bitartaric, butyric, calcium edetate, camsylic, carbonic, chlorobenzoic, -32-cilexetil, citric, edetic, edisylic, estolic, esyl, esylic, formic, fumaric, gluceptic, gluconic, glutamic, glycolic,

glycolylarsanilic, hexamic, hexylresorcjnoic, hydrabamic, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, hydroiodic, hydroxynaphthoic, isethionic, lactic, lactobionic, maleic, malic, malonic, mandelic,

methanesulfonic, methylnitric, methylsulfuric, mucic, muconic, napsylic, nitric, oxalic, p- nitromethanesulfonic, pamoic, pantothenic, phosphoric, monohydrogen phosphoric, dihydrogen phosphoric, phthalic, polygalactouronic, propionic, salicylic, stearic, succinic, sulfamic, sulfanlic, sulfonic, sulfuric, tannic, tartaric, teoclic, toluenesulfonic, and the like. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts may be derived from amino acids, including but not limited to cysteine. Other pharmaceutically acceptable salts may be found, for example, in Stahl et al., Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection, and Use, Wiley-VCH; Verlag Helvetica Chimica Acta, Zurich, 2002. (ISBN 3-906390-26-8). Pharmaceutically-acceptable cations include among others, alkali metal cations (e.g., Li ⁺ , Na ⁺ , K ⁺ ), alkaline earth metal cations (e.g., Ca ²⁺ , Mg ²⁺ ), non-toxic heavy metal cations and ammonium (NH ₄ ⁺ ) and substituted ammonium (N(R') ₄ ⁺ , where R' is hydrogen, alkyl, or substituted alkyl, i.e., including, methyl, ethyl, or hydroxyethyl, specifically, trimethyl ammonium, triethyl ammonium, and triethanol ammonium cations). Pharmaceutically- acceptable anions include among other halides (e.g., CI ^" , Br ^" ), sulfate, acetates (e.g., acetate, trifluoroacetate), ascorbates, aspartates, benzoates, citrates, and lactate.

[0109] The compounds of this invention can contain one or more chiral centers. Accordingly, this invention is intended to include racemic mixtures, diasteromers, enantiomers, tautomers and mixtures enriched in one or more stereoisomer. The scope of the invention as described and claimed encompasses the racemic forms of the compounds as well as the individual enantiomers and non-racemic mixtures thereof.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION [0110] The following definitions and methods are provided to better define the invention and to guide those of ordinary skill in the art in the practice of the invention.

[0111] Referring to the drawings, like numerals indicate like elements and the same number appearing in more than one drawing refers to the same element. Unless otherwise noted, the terms and phrases used herein have their art-recognized meaning, which can be found by reference to standard texts, journal references and contexts known to those skilled in the relevant art.

[0112] The term "inflammation" generally refers to a biological response of tissues to harmful stimuli, such as pathogens, damaged cells, irritants, etc. Inflammation can be either acute or chronic. Acute inflammation is an initial response of the body to harmful stimuli and can be achieved by the increased movement of plasma and leukocytes from the blood into injured tissues. An inflammatory response can involve the local vascular system, the immune system, and/or various cells within the injured tissue. Prolonged inflammation, referred to as chronic inflammation, can lead to a progressive shift in the type of cells which are present at the site of inflammation can be characterized by simultaneous destruction and healing of the tissue from the inflammatory process.

[0113] The term "amino acid" comprises naturally occurring amino acids as well as non-naturally occurring amino acids, including amino acid analogs and derivatives. One skilled in the art will recognize that reference herein to an amino acid includes, for example, naturally occurring proteogenic L-amino acids; D-amino acids; chemically modified amino acids such as amino acid analogs and derivatives; naturally occurring non-proteogenic amino acids, and chemically synthesized compounds having properties known in the art to be characteristic of amino acids.

[0114] The term "nucleic acid" as used herein generally refers to a molecule or strand of DNA, RNA, or derivatives or analogs thereof including one or more nucleobases. Nucleobases comprise purine or pyrimidine bases typically found in DNA or RNA (e.g., adenine, guanine, thymine, cytosine, and/or uracil). The term "nucleic acid" also comprises oligonucleotides and polynucleotides. Nucleic acids may be single-stranded molecules, or they may be double-, triple- or quadruple-stranded molecules that may comprise one or more complementary strands of a particular molecule. "Nucleic acid" includes artificial nucleic acids including peptide nucleic acids, morpholino nucleic acids, glycol nucleic acids and threose nucleic acids. Artificial nucleic acids may be capable of nucleic acid hybridization.

[0115] As used herein, "sequence" means the linear order in which monomers occur in a polymer, the order of amino acids in a polypeptide or the order of nucleotides in a polynucleotide for example.

[0116] The terms "peptide" and "polypeptide" are used synonymously in the present description, and refer to a class of compounds comprising of amino acid residues chemically bonded together by amide bonds (or peptide bonds), regardless of length, functionality, environment, or associated molecule(s). Peptides and polypeptides are polymeric compounds comprising at least two amino acid residues or modified amino acid residues. Modifications can be naturally occurring or non- naturally occurring, such as modifications generated by chemical synthesis. Modifications to amino acids in peptides include, but are not limited to, phosphorylation, glycosylation, lipidation, prenylation, sulfonation, hydroxylation, acetylation, methionine oxidation, alkylation, acylation, carbamylation, iodination and the addition of cofactors. Peptides include proteins and further include compositions generated by degradation of proteins, for example by proteolyic digestion. Peptides and polypeptides can be generated by substantially complete digestion or by partial digestion of proteins. Polypeptides comprising 2 to 100 amino acid units, optionally for some embodiments 2 to 50 amino acid units and, optionally for some embodiments 2 to 20 amino acid units can be used as polypeptide targeting ligands in the invention, for example, where the polypepetide preferentially binds to proteins, peptides or other biomolecules expressed, or otherwise generated by, a target tissue, such as a tumor, precancerous tissue, site of inflammation or other lesion. Typically, the polypeptide is at least four amino acid residues in length and can range up to a full-length protein.

[0117] "Protein" refers to a class of compounds comprising one or more polypeptide chains and/or modified polypeptide chains. Proteins can be modified by naturally occurring processes such as post-translational modifications or co-translational modifications. Exemplary post- translational modifications or co-translational modifications include, but are not limited to, phosphorylation, glycosylation, lipidation, prenylation, sulfonation, hydroxylation, acetylation, methionine oxidation, the addition of cofactors, proteolysis, and assembly of proteins into macromolecular complexes. Modification of proteins can also include non-naturally occurring derivatives, analogues and functional mimetics generated by chemical synthesis. Exemplary derivatives include chemical modifications such as alkylation, acylation, carbamylation, iodination or any modification that derivatizes the protein.

[0118] As used herein, "polynucleotide" and "oligonucleotide" are used interchangeably and refer to a class of compounds composed of nucleic acid residues chemically bonded together. The invention provides optical agents having an oligonucleotide or polynucleotide targeting ligand which comprises a plurality of nucleic acid residues, such as DNA or RNA residues, and/or modified nucleic acid residues that preferentially binds to proteins, peptides or other biomolecules expressed, or otherwise generated by, a target tissue, such as a tumor, precancerous tissue, site of inflammation or other lesion. Modifications to nucleic acid residues can be naturally occurring or non-naturally occurring, such as modifications generated by chemical synthesis. Oligo- or polynucleotide targeting ligands include, for example, oligo- or poly-nucleotides comprising 2 to 100 nucleic acid units, optionally for some embodiments 2 to 50 nucleic acid units and, optionally for some embodiments 2 to 20 nucleic acid units, and optionally for some embodiments 2 to 10 nucleic acid units. Polypeptide and oligonucleotide include a polymer of at least two nucleotides joined together by phosphodiester bonds and may consist of either ribonucleotides or deoxyribonucleotides.

[0119] The term "aptamer" refers to an oligo- or poly-nucleotide or polypeptide that binds to, or otherwise selectively or preferentially associates with, a specific target molecule. For example, the invention provides optical agents having an aptamer targeting ligand that preferentially binds to proteins, peptides or other biomolecules expressed, or otherwise generated by, a target tissue, such as a tumor, precancerous tissue, site of inflammation or other lesion.

[0120] "Peptidomimetic" refers to a molecule having activity, including biological activity, that resembles that of a polypeptide or is substantially the same as a polypeptide. Morphine, for example, is a peptidomimetic of endorphin peptide. In some embodiments, a peptidomimetic is a small protein-like polymer designed to mimic the functionality of a peptide. Peptidomimetics useful as targeting ligands for some compounds of the invention in the present invention include peptoids and β-peptides. The composition and biological activity of peptidomimetics and use of

peptidomimetics in targeted diagnostics and therapeutics are further described in the following references: (1 ) A. Giannis and T. Kolter, Peptidomimetics for Receptor Ligands - Discovery, Development, and Medical Perspectives, Angewandte Chemie International Edition In English, vol. 32, 1993, pg. 1244-1267; (3) Peptidomimetics, Accounts of Chemical Research, Vol. 41 , No. 10, October 208, 1231 -1232, by Wu and Gellman; and (3) Patch, J.A. et al., Versatile oligo(N- substituted)glycines: The many roles of peptoids in drug discovery., Pseudo-Peptides in Drug Discovery 2004, 1-31 P.E. Nielsen.

[0121 ] As used herein, "attaching moiety" refers to a component provided to attach any of R ¹ , R ² or R ³ directly or indirectly to central phenyl group in compounds of the invention. In some embodiments, L and W in formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60) are an attaching moieties.

[0122] As used herein, an "electron withdrawing group" (abbreviated as "EWG") refers to a chemical group that draws electrons or electron density from a center, such a substituted phenyl group of the azide compounds of the invention. In some embodiments, the electron withdrawing group(s) are independently selected from cyano (-CN), carbonyl (-CO), carboxylate (-C0 ₂ R ^a ), halo (-F, -CI, -Br, -I, -At), carbamate (-CONR ^b R ^c ), acyl (-COR ^d ), nitro (-N0 ₂ ), sulfinyl (-SOR ^e ), sulfonyl (-S0 ₂ R , -S0 ₂ OR ⁹ , and -POsR , wherein in the context of this description, R ^a - R' are independently selected to enhance biological and/or physiochemical properties of the optical agents of the invention. In some instances, R ^a - R' are independently selected from any one of a hydrogen atom, an anionic functional group (e.g., carboxylate, sulfonate, sulfate, phosphonate or phosphate) and a hydrophilic functional group (e.g., hydroxyl, carboxyl, sulfonyl, sulfonato or phosphonato). In other instances, R ^a - R' are independently selected from hydrogen, CMO alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -(CH ₂ ) _n OH, -(CH ₂ ) _n C0 ₂ H, -(CH ₂ ) _n S0 ₃ H, -(CH ₂ ) _n S0 ₃ ^~ -(CH ₂ ) _n OS0 ₃ H, - (CH ₂ ) _n OS0 ₃ - -(CH ₂ ) _n NHS0 ₃ H, -(CH ₂ ) _n NHS0 ₃ - -(CH ₂ ) _n P0 ₃ H ₂ , -(CH ₂ ) _n P0 ₃ hr, -(CH ₂ ) _n P0 ₃ ⁼ , - (CH ₂ ) _n OP0 ₃ H ₂ , -(CH ₂ ) _n OP0 ₃ H ^" and -(CH ₂ ) _n OP0 ₃ , wherein n is an integer from 1 to 10. In one example of this embodiment, the EWG(s) are independently selected from is -CN, halo, -C0 ₂ R ^a - COR ^b , -NO ₂ , -S0 ₂ R ^c , or -S0 ₂ NR ^d R ^e , wherein each of R ^a - R ^e is independently H or Ci - C _i0 alkyl. In an embodiment, an EWG is located at the terminus of a substituent arm of a phenyl group of the azide compounds of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60).

[0123] As used herein, an "electron donating group" (abbreviated as "EDG") refers to a chemical group that releases electrons or electron density to a center, such as a substituted phenyl group of the azide compounds of the invention. In some embodiments, the electron donating group(s) are independently selected from C C ₁₀ alkyl, C ₅ -C ₁₀ aryl, -(CH ₂ ) _z OH, -OR ^j , -SR ^k , -NR'R ^m , - N(R ⁿ )COR°, and -P(R ), wherein in the context of this description, R ^j - R are independently selected to enhance biological and/or physiochemical properties of the optical agents of the invention and wherein z is selected from the range of 1 to 10. In some instances, R ^j - R are independently selected from any one of a hydrogen atom, an anionic functional group (e.g., carboxylate, sulfonate, sulfate, phosphonate or phosphate) and a hydrophilic functional group (e.g., hydroxyl, carboxyl, sulfonyl, sulfonato or phosphonato). In other instances, R ^j - R are independently selected from hydrogen, d- ₁₀ alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -(CH ₂ ) _n OH, -(CH ₂ ) _z C0 ₂ H, - (CH ₂ ) _z S0 ₃ H, -(CH ₂ ) _n S0 ₃ ^~ , -(CH ₂ ) _z OS0 ₃ H, -(CH ₂ ) _z OS0 ₃ ^~ , -(CH ₂ ) _z NHS0 ₃ H, -(CH ₂ ) _z NHS0 ₃ ^~ - (CH ₂ ) _z P0 ₃ H ₂ , -(CH ₂ ) _z P0 ₃ H ^" , -(CH ₂ ) _z P0 ₃ ⁼ , -(CH ₂ ) _z OP0 ₃ H ₂ , -(CH ₂ ) _Z OP0 ₃ H ^" and -(CH ₂ ) _z OP0 ₃ ⁼ where z is an integer from 1 to 10. In one example of this embodiment, the EDG(s) are

independently C C ₆ alkyl, -OR , -SR ⁹ , -NR ^h R', or -NR ^j COR ^k , wherein each of R - R ^k is independently H or C-i - C ₀ alkyl. In an embodiment, an EDG is located at the terminus of a substituent arm of a phenyl group of the azide compounds of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60) of the invention.

[0124] In embodiments, two substituents, such as EDG and EWG substituents, on a compound of the invention can act in what is known as a "push-pull" arrangement. In embodiments of the "push-pull" arrangement, the electron density of the compound or a portion thereof, such as an aryl or heteroaryl group, is polarized due in part to the location of an EWG and EDG on the compound. In embodiments of the "push-pull' arrangement, an EWG is positioned at a terminus of a substituent arm of the structure and an EDG is positioned at a terminus of a different substituent arm of the structure. In embodiments of the "push-pull" arrangement, an EWG is positioned at one end of a π bond and an EDG is positioned at the other end of a π bond. In an embodiment, an EWG is positioned para- to an EDG in a six-membered ring structure. In an embodiment, an EWG is positioned trans- to an EDG in an alkylene structure. In some embodiments, compounds having the "push-pull" arrangement exhibit a shift in the optical absorbance and emission spectrum as compared to compounds not having the "push-pull" arrangement.

[0125] Optical agent" generally refers to compounds, compositions, preparations, and/or formulations that absorb, emit, or scatter electromagnetic radiation of wavelength generally in the range of 350 - 1300 nanometers, within a biologically relevant environment or condition. In some embodiments, optical agents of the invention, when excited by electromagnetic radiation, undergo emission via fluorescence or phosphorescence pathways. These pathways are useful for diagnostic imaging, visualization, or organ function monitoring. Compounds belonging to this class are commonly referred to as "optical imaging agents" or "optical contrast agents." In some other embodiments, optical agents of the invention absorb electromagnetic radiation and undergo photochemical reactions such as photofragmentation of one or more photolabile bonds to generate reactive species such as nitrenes, carbene, free radicals, ions, excited species, etc. This process is useful for a wide range of phototherapy applications, for example in the treatment of tumors or other lesions. Compounds belonging to this class are commonly referred to as "photosensitizers." The term "photosensitizer" refers to a phototherapeutic agent or a component thereof providing for photoactivation, for example, photoactivation resulting in generation of reactive species that locally kill, injure, inactivate or otherwise degrade cells (e.g. , cancer cells, tumor cells, non-cancer cells, etc.). Photosensitizers of some embodiments undergo photoactivation that initiates bond cleavage reactions, such as photolysis and/or nitrogen extrusion reactions, thereby generating reactive species capable of causing localized cell death or injury. Optical agents include Type 1 and Type 2 phototherapeutic agents. Optical agents include, but are not limited to, phototherapeutic agents (Type 1 and 2), photosensitizers, imaging agents, dyes, detectable agents, photosensitizer agents, photoactivators, and photoreactive agents; and conjugates, complexes, and derivatives thereof.

[0126] As used herein, a "chromophore" is a compound or functional group of a compound that results in absorption of electromagnetic radiation, preferably for some applications electromagnetic radiation having wavelengths in the UV (e.g. 200 nm to 350 nm) or visible (e.g. 350 nm to 750 nm) regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.

[0127] As used herein, a "fluorophore" is a compound or functional group of a compound that results in absorption of electromagnetic radiation and subsequent fluorescence. Preferably for some applications incorporation of a fluorophore results in compounds of the invention that absorb electromagnetic radiation and generate fluorescence having wavelengths in the UV (e.g. 200 nm to 350 nm) or visible (e.g. 350 nm to 750 nm) region of the electromagnetic spectrum. In some embodiments, incorporation of a fluorophore results in compounds having an appreciable quantum yield for fluorescence, such as a quantum yield selected over the range of 0.001 to 1 , 0.01 to 1 , and optionally 0.1 to 1 . Optical agents of the present invention can contain fluorophores.

Fluorophores can be functional groups in a molecule which absorb electromagnetic radiation of first specific wavelengths and re-emit energy at second specific wavelengths. The amount and distribution of wavelengths of the emitted electromagnetic radiation depend on both the fluorophore and the chemical environment of the fluorophore. The term "fluorophore" may be abbreviated throughout the present description as "FL". In aspects of the invention, fluorophores emit energy in the visible (e.g. 350 nm to 750 nm) and NIR regions (e.g., 750 - 1300nm) of the electromagnetic spectrum.

[0128] As used herein, the term "luminescence" refers to the emission of electromagnetic radiation from excited electronic states of atoms or molecules. Luminescence generally refers to electromagnetic radiation emission, such as photoluminescence, chemiluminescence, and electrochemiluminescence, among others. In photoluminescence, including fluorescence and phosphorescence, the excited electronic state is created by the absorption of electromagnetic radiation. Luminescence detection involves detection of one or more properties of the

luminescence or associated luminescence process. These properties can include intensity, excitation and/or emission spectrum, polarization, lifetime, and energy transfer, among others. These properties can also include time-independent (steady-state) and/or time-dependent (time- resolved) properties of the luminescence. Representative luminescence techniques include fluorescence intensity (FLINT), fluorescence polarization (FP), fluorescence resonance energy transfer (FRET), fluorescence lifetime (FLT), total internal reflection fluorescence (TIRF), fluorescence correlation spectroscopy (FCS), fluorescence recovery after photobleaching (FRAP), and bioluminescence resonance energy transfer (BRET), among others. By way of example, when an optical agent is used in the present invention, it is desirable that the wavelength of radiation be non-ionizing and be such that it excites the optical agent. This excitation can cause a bond of the molecule to break and can lead to creation of one or more appropriate radical(s). This excitation can also cause the molecule to emit part of the absorbed energy at a different wavelength. Such emission can be detected using fluorometric techniques as described above. One skilled in the art can readily determine the most appropriate treatment and optional detection technique based, at least in part, on the specific phototherapeutic agent(s) administered and/or the particular use (e.g., tissue to be treated).

[0129] Optical condition" refers to one or more of the following: the fluorescence quantum yield, fluorescence intensity, fluorescence excitation wavelength, wavelength distribution or spectrum, emission wavelength, wavelength distribution or spectrum, Stokes shift, color, reflectance, phosphorescence, chemiluminescence, scattering, and/or other observable and/or measurable spectral property or phenomenon.

[0130] "Phototherapy procedure" refers to a therapeutic procedure involving administration of a phototherapeutic agent to a patient followed by subsequent excitation by exposure to applied electromagnetic radiation, such as electromagnetic radiation having wavelengths in the visible and/or near IR region of the electromagnetic spectrum. Such wavelengths can be in the range of 350 - 1300 nanometers, so as to generate a therapeutically effective amount of excited phototherapeutic agent. Phototherapy includes, but is not limited to, photodynamic therapy. As used herein, "phototherapy" includes procedures involving administration of Type 1 and/or Type 2 phototherapeutic agents, optionally further including administration of one or more additional therapeutic agents.

[0131] A detectable optical signal may be, for example, an observable change in absorbance, reflectance, phosphorescence, chemiluminescence, scattering, or other spectral property. [0132] As used herein, "tumor-specific agent" refers to a compound or composition, such as an optical agent, that preferentially accumulates in a tumor at a higher level than normal tissue regardless of the particular mechanism of uptake in the tumors, for example, receptor mediated or enhanced permeability and retention (EPR). Optical agents of the invention include tumor-specific agents, including tumor specific phototherapy agents, for example having a targeting ligand providing specificity in the administration, delivery and/or binding to tumor tissue.

[0133] As used herein, "targeting ligand" (abbreviated as Bm) refers to a chemical group and/or substituent having functionality for targeting a compound of any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX60) to an anatomical and/or physiological site of a patient, such as a selected cell, tissue or organ. For some embodiments, a targeting ligand is characterized as a ligand that selectively or preferentially binds to a specific biological site(s) (e.g., enzymes, receptors, etc.) and/or biological surface(s) (e.g., membranes, fibrous networks, etc.). In an embodiment, the invention provides compounds having any one of formula (FX1) - (FX60), wherein Bm is an amino acid, or a polypeptide comprising 2 to 30 amino acid units. In an embodiment, the invention provides compounds having any one of formula (FX1) - (FX60), wherein Bm is a mono- or polysaccharide comprising 1 to 50 carbohydrate units. In an embodiment, the invention provides compounds having any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX60), wherein Bm is a mono-, oligo- or poly-nucleotide comprising 1 to 50 nucleic acid units. In an embodiment, the invention provides compounds having any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX60), wherein Bm is a protein, an enzyme, a carbohydrate, a peptidomimetic, a glycomimetic, a glycopeptide, a glycoprotein, a lipid, an antibody (polyclonal or monoclonal), or fragment thereof. In an embodiment, the invention provides compounds having any one of formula (FX1 ) - (FX60), wherein Bm is an aptamer. In an embodiment, the invention provides compounds having any one of formula (FX1) - (FX60), wherein Bm is a drug, a hormone, steroid or a receptor. In some embodiments, each occurrence of Bm in the compounds of (FX1 ) - (FX60) is

independently a monoclonal antibody, a polyclonal antibody, a metal complex, an albumin, or an inclusion compound such as a cyclodextrin. In some embodiments, each occurrence of Bm in the compounds of (FX1 ) - (FX60) is independently integrin, selectin, vascular endothelial growth factor, fibrin, tissue plasminogen, thrombin, LDL, HDL, Sialyl LewisX or a mimic thereof, or an atherosclerotic plaque binding molecule. Throughout the present description, the term

"biomolecule" can be a targeting ligand (Bm).

[0134] In the compounds of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60), Bm is a targeting ligand, optionally providing molecular recognition functionality. In some embodiments, the targeting ligand is a particular region of the compound that is recognized by, and binds to, a target site on an organ, tissue, tumor or cell. Targeting ligands are often, but not always, associated with biomolecules or fragments thereof which include, but are not limited to, hormones, amino acids, peptides, peptidomimetics, proteins, nucleosides, nucleotides, nucleic acids, enzymes, carbohydrates, glycomimetics, lipids, albumins, mono- and polyclonal antibodies, receptors, inclusion compounds such as cyclodextrins, and receptor binding molecules. Targeting ligands for use in the invention can also include synthetic polymers. Examples of synthetic polymers that are useful for targeting ligands include polyaminoacids, polyols, polyamines, polyacids,

oligonucleotides, aborols, dendrimers, and aptamers. Still other examples of useful targeting ligands can include integrin, selectin, vascular endothelial growth factor, fibrin, tissue plasminogen activator, thrombin, LDL, HDL, Sialyl LewisX and its mimics, and atherosclerotic plaque binding molecules.

[0135] Specific examples of targeting ligands include, but are not limited to: steroid hormones for the treatment of breast and prostate lesions; whole or fragmented somatostatin, bombesin, and neurotensin receptor binding molecules for the treatment of neuroendocrine tumors; whole or fragmented cholecystekinin receptor binding molecules for the treatment of lung cancer; whole or fragmented heat sensitive bacterioendotoxin (ST) receptor and carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA) binding molecules for the treatment of colorectal cancer; dihydroxyindolecarboxylic acid and other melanin producing biosynthetic intermediates for the treatment of melanoma; whole or fragmented integrin receptor and atherosclerotic plaque binding molecules for the treatment of vascular diseases; and whole or fragmented amyloid plaque binding molecules for the treatment of brain lesions. In some embodiments, Bm, if present, is selected from heat-sensitive bacterioendotoxin receptor binding peptide, carcinoembryonic antigen antibody (anti-CEA), bombesin receptor binding peptide, neurotensin receptor binding peptide, cholecystekinin receptor binding peptide, somastatin receptor binding peptide, ST receptor binding peptide, neurotensin receptor binding peptide, leukemia binding peptides, folate receptor binding agents, steroid receptor binding peptide, carbohydrate receptor binding peptide or estrogen. In another embodiment Bm, if present, is a ST enterotoxin or fragment thereof. In some embodiments, Bm, if present, is selected from octreotide and octreotate peptides. In another embodiment Bm, if present, is a synthetic polymer. Examples of synthetic polymers useful for some applications include polyaminoacids, polyols, polyamines, polyacids, oligonucleotides, aborols, dendrimers, and aptamers! Examples of specific peptide targeting ligands are described in WO/2008/108941 .

[0136] "Target tissue" refers to tissue of a subject to which an optical agent is administered or otherwise contacted, for example during a biomedical procedure such as an optical imaging, phototherapy, monitoring or visualization procedure. Target tissues can be contacted with an optical agent of the invention under in vivo conditions in vitro conditions or ex vivo conditions. Target tissues in some embodiments include cancerous tissue, cancer cells, precancerous tissue, a tumor, a lesion, a site of inflammation, or vasculature tissue. In some embodiments, a target tissue includes a melanoma cell, a breast lesion, a prostate lesion, a lung cancer cell, a colorectal cancer cell, an atherosclerotic plaque, a brain lesion, a blood vessel lesion, a lung lesion, a heart lesion, a throat lesion, an ear lesion, a rectal lesion, a bladder lesion, a stomach lesion, an intestinal lesion, an esophagus lesion, a liver lesion, a pancreatic lesion, and a solid tumor. Target tissue in some embodiments refers to a selected organ of the subject or component thereof, such as lung, heart, brain, stomach, liver, kidneys, gallbladder, pancreas, intestines, rectum, skin, colon, prostate, ovaries, breast, bladder, blood vessel, throat, ear, or esophagus.

[0137] Methods of this invention comprise the step of administering an "effective amount" of the present diagnostic and therapeutic compositions, formulations and preparations containing the present compounds or compositions, to diagnose, image, monitor, evaluate, treat, reduce, alleviate, ameliorate or regulate a biological condition and/or disease state in a patient. The term "effective amount," as used herein, refers to the amount of the diagnostic and therapeutic formulation, that, when administered to the individual is effective to diagnose, image, monitor, evaluate, treat, reduce alleviate, ameliorate or regulate a biological condition and/or disease state. As is understood in the art, an effective amount of a given composition or formulation will depend at least in part upon the mode of administration (e.g. intravenous, oral, topical administration), any carrier or vehicle employed, and the specific individual to whom the formulation is to be

administered (age, weight, condition, sex, etc.). The dosage requirements needed to achieve the "effective amount" vary with the particular formulations employed, the route of administration, and clinical objectives. Based on the results obtained in standard pharmacological test procedures, projected daily dosages of active compound or composition can be determined as is understood in the art.

[0138] In an embodiment, an effective amount of a compound or composition of the invention is a therapeutically effective amount. As used herein, the phrase "therapeutically effective" qualifies the amount of compound or composition administered in the therapy. This amount achieves the goal of ameliorating, suppressing, eradicating, preventing, reducing the risk of, or delaying the onset of a targeted condition. In an embodiment, an effective amount of a compound or composition of the invention is a diagnostically effective amount. As used herein, the phrase "diagnostically effective" qualifies the amount of compound or composition administered in diagnosis, for example of a disease state or other pathological condition. The amount achieves the goal of being detectable while avoiding adverse side effects found with higher doses. In an embodiment, an active ingredient or other component is included in a therapeutically acceptable amount. In an embodiment, an active ingredient or other component is included in a diagnostically acceptable amount.

[0139] It is contemplated that the compounds and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the invention can be used as part of a combination. The term "combination" means the administration of two or more compounds directed to a target condition. The treatments of the combination generally can be co-administered in a simultaneous manner. Two compounds can be coadministered as, for example: (a) a single formulation (e.g., a single capsule) having a fixed ratio of active ingredients; or (b) multiple, separate formulations (e.g., multiple capsules) for each compound. The treatments of the combination can alternatively (or additionally) be administered at different times. [0140] In certain embodiments, the invention encompasses administering optical agents useful in the invention to a patient or subject. A "patient" or "subject", used equivalently herein, refers to an animal. In particular, an animal refers to a mammal, preferably a human. The subject can either: (1 ) have a condition able to be monitored, diagnosed, prevented and/or treated by administration of an optical agent of the invention; or (2) is susceptible to a condition that is able to be monitored, diagnosed, prevented and/or treated by administering an optical agent of the invention.

[0141] When used herein, the terms "diagnosis", "diagnostic" and other root word derivatives are as understood in the art and are further intended to include a general monitoring, characterizing and/or identifying a state of health or disease. The term is meant to encompass the concept of prognosis. For example, the diagnosis of cancer can include an initial determination and/or one or more subsequent assessments regardless of the outcome of a previous finding. The term does not necessarily imply a defined level of certainty regarding the prediction of a particular status or outcome.

[0142] As defined herein, "administering" means that a compound or formulation thereof of the invention, such as an optical agent, is provided to a patient or subject, for example in a

therapeutically effective amount. The invention includes methods for a biomedical procedure wherein a therapeutically or diagnostically effective amount of a compound having any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60) is administered to a patient in need of treatment, for example to a patient undergoing treatment for a diagnosed diseased state including cancer and vascular diseases. Administering can be carried out by a range of techniques known in the art including parenteral administration including intravenous, intraperitoneal or subcutaneous injection or infusion, oral administration, topical or transdermal absorption through the skin, or by inhalation, for example. The chosen route of administration may depend on such factors as solubility of the compound or composition, location of targeted condition, and other factors which are within the knowledge of one having ordinary skill in the relevant art.

[0143] "Topical administration" includes the use of transdermal administration, such as transdermal patches or iontophoresis devices.

[0144] "Parenteral administration" includes subcutaneous injections, intravenous injections, intraarterial injections, intraorbital injections, intracapsular injections, intraspinal injections, intraperitoneal injections, intramuscular injections, intrasternal injections, and infusion. Dosage forms suitable for parenteral administration include solutions, suspensions, dispersions, emulsions, and any other dosage form that can be administered parenterally.

[0145] As used herein, the term "controlled-release component" refers to an agent that facilitates the controlled-release of a compound including, but not limited to, polymers, polymer matrices, gels, permeable membranes, liposomes, microspheres, or the like, or any combination thereof. Methods for producing compounds in combination with controlled-release components are known to those of skill in the art. [0146] As used herein, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable" means approved by a regulatory agency of an appropriate federal or state government; or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopoeia or other generally recognized pharmacopoeia for use in animals, and more particularly in humans; or does not impart significant deleterious or undesirable effect on a subject to whom it is administered and in the context in which it is administered.

[0147] As will be clear to those of ordinary skill in the art, the groups and structures described herein as portions of the compounds of the invention may be defined as if they are separate valence-satisfied chemical structures. It is intended that when a group is described or shown as being a substituent of another group, that the group be viewed as having a valency to allow this binding to occur.

[0148] The invention is further detailed in the following Examples, which are offered by way of illustration and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention in any manner.

EXAMPLE 1 : AZIDE DERIVATIVES FOR PHOTOTHERAPY

1.a. Type 1 Phototherapeutic Agents

[0149] In an embodiment, the invention provides Type 1 phototherapeutic agents, including compositions, preparations and formulations, and methods of using and making Type 1 phototherapeutic agents. Type 1 phototherapeutic agents of the invention include compounds comprising one or more azide group directly linked to a substituted phenyl group having fluorine substituents. Incorporation of an azide group directly linked to a substituted phenyl group having fluorine substituents in some compounds provides a chromophore moiety capable of absorption of electromagnetic radiation, preferably for some applications electromagnetic radiation having wavelengths in the visible (e.g. 350 nm to 750 nm) and NIR regions (e.g., 750 - 1300nm) of the electromagnetic spectrum. The substituted phenyl group having fluorine substituents of some compositions of the invention may function as an aromatic antenna group for coupling energy from incident electromagnetic radiation into the phototherapeutic agent. In some phototherapeutic agents of the present invention, for example, energy coupled into the phototherapeutic agent is subsequently transferred to the surroundings to achieve a desired therapeutic outcome.

Incorporation of an antenna group comprising a substituted phenyl group having fluorine substituents is useful in some embodiments for photo-activating the azide groups, for example, by initiating cleavage of photolabile nitrogen-nitrogen bonds of -N ₃ groups upon absorption of electromagnetic radiation and subsequent internal energy transfer processes. Cleavage of a nitrogen-nitrogen bond of an -N ₃ group generates one or more reactive species capable of causing localized tissue damage, such as cell death, inactivation or injury, such as nitrene radical and/or excited nitrogen.

[0150] Some compounds of the invention operate through the Type 1 phototherapy mechanism as schematically illustrated in Figures 1A - 1 D wherein the photosensitizer is activated upon exposure to electromagnetic radiation, thereby producing reactive species. Figures 1 A - 1 B provide schematic representations of reaction mechanisms for phototherapeutic agents having formula (FX1 ), and Figures 1 C and 1 D provide schematic representations of reaction mechanisms for phototherapeutic agents having formula (FX37). As schematically represented by the arrow and hv in Figures 1A-1 D, compounds of the present invention are photoactivated by exposure to visible or near infrared electromagnetic radiation, for example electromagnetic radiation having wavelengths ranging from 350 nm to 1300 nm. Absorption of at least a portion of the applied electromagnetic radiation generates a therapeutically effective amount of photoactivated phototherapeutic agent, which is schematically represented in figures 1A-1 D by the compound provided in brackets with an asterisk symbol (*). Activation of the phototherapeutic agent may occur via a single photon absorption process, a multi-photon absorption process or a combination of a single photon absorption process and a multi-photon absorption process. The activated photosensitizer subsequently undergoes processes, such as internal energy transfer and/or bond cleavage processes, resulting in formation of reactive species capable of causing a desired therapeutic result. Reactive species generated by the compounds of the invention may include free radicals, ions, electrons, electrophiles, nitrene, vibrationally excited species, and

translationally excited species. As illustrated in Figures 1 B and 1 D, excitation of the

photosensitizer in these embodiments causes cleavage of a nitrogen-nitrogen bond of the -N ₃ group, thereby generating a nitrene reactive intermediate. In the mechanism shown in Figures 1 B and 1 D, excitation of the fluorine substituted phenyl results in rapid intramolecular energy transfer to the azide group resulting in bond cleavage and formation of reactive species. In some embodiments, the reactive species generated upon excitation of the photosensitizer collide, react with, or otherwise interact with cell components of a target organ or tissue class, thereby resulting in death, injury and/or damage to cells at the target tissue.

[0151] Type 1 phototherapeutic agents useful for certain phototherapy applications incorporate a central phenyl group substituted with substituents resulting in strong absorbance in the visible and/or NIR region of the electromagnetic spectrum. In an embodiment, the central phenyl group is functionalized by addition of substituents providing excitation wavelength selection and/or tunability. In some embodiments, for example, the central phenyl group has one or more electron donating groups and/or electron withdrawing groups provided as ring substituents for providing selected excitation characteristics, such as a selected absorption spectrum and/or strong absorption in the visible and/or NIR regions.

[0152] Selection of R ¹ - R ³ in the compounds of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60)

establishes, at least in part, the physical, chemical, optical and/or pharmacokinetic properties of optical agents for the present compositions and methods. In some embodiments, for example, R ¹ - R ³ are selected to provide optical properties supporting and enabling use of these compositions in phototherapeutic methods, such as providing one or more of the following: (i) large extinction coefficients; (ii) strong absorption in the visible and/or infrared regions of the electromagnetic spectrum (e.g., 350 to 1300 nanometers, preferably for some applications 350-900 nanometers); and (iii) a large quantum yield for the production of reactive species, such as free radicals or ions, capable of causing photoactivation initiated tissue damage. Selection of the composition of R ¹ - R ³ in the compounds of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60) may also be based, at least in part, on a number of pharmacokinetic and physical properties supporting effective delivery and clearance of the optical agents of the present methods and compositions. Such factors may include solubility, toxicity, immune response, biocompatibility, and bioclearance considerations. In some

embodiments, any one of R ¹ - R ³ in the compounds of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60) comprise a hydrophilic group, a lipophilic group, hydrophobic group, or an amphiphilic group. In an embodiment, at least one of R ¹ - R ³ is a substituent comprising poly(ethylene glycol) (PEG, - (CH ₂ OCH ₂ ) _b -), or a derivative of PEG.

[0153] In an embodiment, a phototherapeutic agent of the invention incorporates a substituted phenyl group that is derivatized by the addition of at least one electron withdrawing group and at least one electron donating group bonded directly or indirectly to a carbon atom of the ring structure. In an embodiment, for example, one or more the electron withdrawing (EWG) and electron donating (EDG) group(s) are directly attached to the ring structure of the central phenyl group. In another embodiment, EWG and EDG are indirectly attached to the to the ring structure of the central phenyl group through an unsaturated spacer that is in conjugation with the double bonds of the central phenyl group. Electron donating and withdrawing groups in these

compositions may be positioned ortho, meta or para to each other with respect to the to the ring structure of the central phenyl group. In some embodiments, for example, two electron withdrawing groups are positioned para to each other on the ring structure of the central phenyl group and two electron donating groups are positioned para to each other on the ring structure of the central phenyl group. In some embodiments, electron withdrawing groups and electron donating groups are positioned so as to make the overall compound symmetrical.

[0154] Optical agents of the invention support a broad therapeutic platform useful for a variety of in vivo phototherapy procedures, for example for the treatment of cancer, stenosis,

inflammation, infection and arthritis. Optical agents of the invention are optionally multifunctional agents capable of providing a useful combination of photodiagnostic, phototherapeutic, molecular recognition and/or targeting functionality. In an embodiment, for example, a dye component is incorporated into the phototherapeutic agent of the present compositions for imparting useful optical functionality, for example by functioning as an optical absorber, chromophore, and/or fluorophore. This functionality is useful for targeted administration and excitation of the therapeutic agent. Optionally, optical agents of the invention further comprise a targeting component, such as a targeting ligand. In an embodiment, for example, an optical agent of the invention comprises a targeting ligand integrated with a photosensitizer component to access enhanced administration, delivery and photoactivation functionality for phototherapy. Optical agents and bioconjugates thereof are provided having one or more targeting ligands covalently bonded to or non-covalently associated with the phototherapeutic agents of the present invention, thereby providing specificity for administering, targeting, delivering and/or localizing an optical agent to a specific biological environment, such as a target tissue such as a specific organ, tissue, cell type or tumor site.

[0155] In the compounds of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60), Bm is a targeting ligand, optionally providing molecular recognition functionality. In some embodiments, the targeting ligand is a particular region of the compound that is recognized by, and binds to, the target site on the organ, tissue, tumor or cell. Targeting ligands are often, but not always, associated with biomolecules or fragments thereof which include hormones, amino acids, peptides,

peptidomimetics, proteins, nucleosides, nucleotides, nucleic acids, enzymes, carbohydrates, glycomimetics, lipids, albumins, mono- and polyclonal antibodies, receptors, inclusion compounds such as cyclodextrins, and receptor binding molecules. Specific examples of biomolecules include steroid hormones for the treatment of breast and prostate lesions; somatostatin receptor binding molecules, bombesin receptor binding molecules, and neurotensin receptor binding molecules for the treatment of neuroendocrine tumors, cholecystekinin receptor binding molecules for the treatment of lung cancer; heat sensitive bacterioendotoxin (ST) receptor binding molecules and carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA) binding molecules for the treatment of colorectal cancer, dihydroxyindolecarboxylic acid and other melanin producing biosynthetic intermediates for melanoma, integrin receptor and atheroscleratic plaque binding molecules for the treatment of vascular diseases, amyloid plaque binding molecules for the treatment of brain lesions, cholecystokinin (CCK) receptor binding molecules, steroid receptor binding molecules, carbohydrate receptor binding molecules, dihydroxyindole-2-carboxylic acid, and combinations thereof. Targeting ligands for use in the invention may also include synthetic polymers. Examples of synthetic polymers include polyaminoacids, polyols, polyamines, polyacids, oligonucleotides, aborols, dendrimers, and aptamers. Still other examples of appropriate targeting ligands may include integrin, selectin, vascular endothelial growth factor, fibrin, tissue plasminogen activator, thrombin, LDL, HDL, Sialyl LewisX and its mimics, and atherosclerotic plaque binding molecules.

[0156] Successful specific targeting of fluorescent dyes to tumors using antibodies and peptides for diagnostic imaging of tumors has been demonstrated, for example, S. A. Achilefu et al., Novel receptor-targeted fluorescent contrast agents for in vivo tumor imaging, Investigative Radiology, 2000, 35(8), 479-485; B. Ballou et al., Tumor labeling in vivo using cyanine-conjugated monoclonal antibodies, Cancer Immunology and Immunotherapy, 1995,41 ,247-263; K. Licha et al., New contrast agent for optical imaging: acid-cleavable conjugates of cyanine dyes with biomolecules, In Biomedical Imaging: Reporters, Dyes, and Instrumentation, D. J. Bomhop, C. Contag, and E. M. Sevick-Muraca (Eds.), Proceedings of SPIE, 1999, 3600, 29-35, each of which are expressly incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. Therefore, the inventive receptor-targeted phototherapeutic agents are expected to be effective in the treatment of various lesions.

[0157] In one example, a targeting ligand may contain all or part of a steroid hormone or a steroid receptor binding compound, and therefore target steroid hormone sensitive receptors. In this example, the compound is administered, targets the desired site such as breast and/or prostate lesion, is photoactivated, and forms free radicals at this site thereby effecting cell injury, damage, or death at the desired target site. Similar target binding molecules and uses will be recognized by one skilled in the art. For example, the targeting group may be a compound that targets and binds to a somatostatin, bombesin, CCK, and/or neurotensin receptor binding molecule, or may be a carcinogenic embryonic antigen-binding compound that binds to a carcinogenic embryonic antigen. These are then photoactivated for radical formation at, for example, lung cancer cells with CCK receptor binding molecules, colorectal cancer cells with ST receptor and carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA) binding molecules, melanoma cells with dihyroxyindolecarboxylic acid, vascular sites of atherosclerotic plaque with integrin receptor binding molecules, brain lesions with amyloid plaque binding molecules, and the like.

[0158] The optical agents of this example may contain additional functionalities that can be used to attach various types of biomolecules, synthetic polymers, and organized aggregates for selective delivery to various organs or tissues of interest. Examples of synthetic polymers include polyaminoacids, polyols, polyamines, polyacids, oligonucleotides, aborols, dendrimers, and aptamers. The invention includes, but is not limited to, phototherapeutic agents comprising a photosensitizer - biomolecule conjugate which provide advantages over nonspecific

phototherapeutic agents or the conjugation of photosensitizers to very large biomolecules. These conjugates provide enhanced localization and rapid visualization of tumors which is beneficial for both diagnosis and therapy. The agents are rapidly cleared from blood and non-target tissues so there is less concern for accumulation and for toxicity. A variety of high purity compounds may be synthesized for combinatorial screening of new targets, e.g., to identify receptors or targeting agents, and for the ability to affect the pharmacokinetics of the conjugates by minor structural changes.

[0159] In some embodiments, a liposome or micelle may be utilized as a carrier or vehicle for the composition. For example, in some embodiments, a phototherapeutic agent comprises a azide photosensitizer that may be a part of the lipophilic bilayers or micelle, and the targeting ligand, if present, may be on the external surface of the liposome or micelle. As another example, a targeting ligand may be externally attached to the liposome or micelle after formulation for targeting the liposome or micelle (which contains the azide phototherapeutic

agent/photosensitizer) to the desired tissue, organ, or other site in the body.

1.b. Synthesis of Phototherapeutic Agents

[0160] Methods for the synthesis of azide compounds are known in the art. For example, arylazide compounds may be prepared via the displacement of either the fluoro or the diazonium group with sodium azide. Properties and methods of synthesizing and derivatizing azide compounds are disclosed in Sandler and Kara (Sandler, S.R.; Kara, W. Azides. In Organic Functional Group Preparations, Vol. 12-11. Academic Press: New York, pp. 323-349, 1986). Figure 9 provides general schemes for the synthesis of substituted phenyl azide compounds with a substituted benzene precursor. As shown in Figure 9, an additional step is required for the preparation of azides because the amine has to be converted to the diazonium salt before addition of sodium azide. The process shown in Figure 9 is a two-step, one-pot reaction, and the diazonium salt is generally not isolated.

1 .b.(i) Preparation of azide-based photosensitizers.

[0161] Preparation of the azide-based photosensitizers (FX34), (FX36), (FX35), and (FX39) and of a leukemia cell binding heptapeptide bioconjugate (FX41 ) [see, Jaalouk, D., Compositions and methods related to peptide that selectively bind leukemia cells, WO 2006/010070, 2006] are shown in Scheme 1 below. The azide 1 was prepared by reacting pentafluoronitrobenzene with sodium azide as described previously. [Mukai, T.; Kumagai, T.; Saiki, H.; Kawamura, Y. Photochemical behavior of cyclic imino ethers: the nitrogen-oxygen bond fission, syn-anti isomerization and cycloaddition reactions in the C:N-0 chromophore. Journal of Photochemistry 1981 , 17, 365-368.] Treatment of the nitroazide 1 with one equivalent of the amines 2a,b gave predominantly the mono adducts (FX34) and (FX36) along with small amount (ca. 10%) of the di-substituted products (FX35), and (FX39). The heptapeptide, SFFWLRS (5), was prepared by a solid phase method using an automated peptide synthesizer. The acid (FX36) was coupled to the hetapeptide 5 by the standard active ester procedure. [Hermanson, G.T. Bioconjugate Techniques (Second Edition). Academic Press: New York, 2008.] The mono adducts (FX34) and (FX36) were readily separated by column chromatography.

[0162] Scheme 1

(ΓΧ34): R ¹ -H; R ² -(CH ₂ ) ₃ OH (ΓΧ35): R ¹ -H; R ² -(CH ₂ ) ₃ OH (ΓΧ36): R ¹ -H; R ² -CH ₂ C0 ₂ H (FX39): R ¹ -H; R ² -CH ₂ C0 ₂ H (ΓΧ38): R ¹ -Me; R ² -CH ₂ C0 ₂ H (FX40): R' -Me; R ² -CH ₂ C0 ₂ H

1 .b.(ii) General Synthesis of Azide Derivatives (FX34) and (FX35)

[0163] A solution of methyl 4-azido-2,3,5,6-tetrafluoro-nitrobenzene (1 .18 g, 5.0 mmol), 3- aminopropan-1 -ol (0.4 g, 5.5 mmol), and triethylamine (0.61 g, 6.0 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 imL) was heated under reflux for 2 hours. The dark brown reaction mixture was poured onto water and extracted with methylene chloride (3 x 20 imL). The organic layer was separated, washed with water, dried over anhydrous Na ₂ S0 ₄ , filtered, and the filtrate evaporated in vacuo to give dark brown gum. The crude product was purified by automated flash chromatography (silica gel, 40 g RediSep™ prepacked cartridge) using chloroform-methanol gradient (0 to 5% methanol) to give 480 mg of (FX34) as brown gum and 1 10 mg of (FX35) as purple gum, which solidified upon standing. Compound (FX34): ¹ H-NMR (CDCI ₃ ) δ (ppm): 6.62 (bs, 1 H), 3.78 (m, 2H), 3.58 (m, 2H), 1 .87 (m, 2H), 1 .71 (bs, 1 H). LRMS m/Z, 292.2 (M+H). UV, _max . 424 nm. Compound (FX35): ¹ H- NMR (CDCI ₃ ) δ (ppm): 7.39 (bs, 2H), 3.78 (m, 4H), 3.58 (m, 4H), 1 .87 (m, 4H), 1 .43 (bs, 2H). LRMS m/Z, 347.4 (M+H). UV, _max . 486 nm.

1 .b.(iii) General Synthesis of Azide Derivative (FX36)

(FX36)

[0164] A solution of methyl 4-azido-2,3,5,6-tetrafluoro-nitrobenzene (1 .18 g, 5.0 mmol), glycine (0.71 g, 5.5 mmol), and triethylamine (10 imL) in ethanol (80 imL) and ethyl acetate (40 imL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 16 hours. The solvent was evaporated and the residue was redissolved in water, the pH adjusted to 2, and the solution was extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 20 mL). The organic layer was separated, washed with water, dried over anhydrous Na2S0 ₄ , filtered, and the filtrate evaporated in vacuo to give (FX36) as brown solid, which was pure enough for most purposes and was used as such without further purification. LRMS m/Z, 292.2 (M+H). UV, _max : 406 nm.

1 .b.(iv) General Synthesis Of Azide Derivative (FX37)

[0165] A solution of methyl 4-azido-2,3,5,6-tetrafluoro-benzoate (498 mg, 2.0 mmol), 3- aminopropan-1 -ol (150 mg, 2.0 mmol), and triethylamine (222 mg, 2.2 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 mL) was heated under reflux for 3 hours. The dark brown reaction mixture was poured onto water and extracted with methylene chloride (3 x 20 mL). The organic layer was separated, washed with water, dried over anhydrous Na ₂ S0 ₄ , filtered, and the filtrate evaporated in vacuo to give dark brown gum. The crude product was purified by automated flash chromatography (silica gel, 40 g RediSep™ prepacked cartridge) using chloroform-methanol gradient (0 to 5% methanol) to give 380 mg (48%) of (FX37) as pale green crystals. ¹ H-NMR (CDCI ₃ ) δ (ppm): 7.03 (bs, 1 H), 3.92 (s, 3H), 3.75 (t, 2H), 3.53 (m, 2H), 1 .85 (m, 2H), 1.61 (bs, 1 H). ¹³ C-NMR (CDCI ₃ ) δ (ppm): 166.4, 148.8, 148.7, 146.7, 141 .8, 139.9, 137.1 , 136.5, 134.6, 100.7, 60.5, 52.5, 43.5, 33.2. LRMS m/Z, 305.3 (M+H). UV. max: 356 nm.

1.b.(v) Preparation of Azide Bioconiuqates

[0166] Figure 7 provides general schemes for the syntheses of bioconjugates of azide optical agents having formula (FX1 ). As shown in Figure 7, an azide compound is provided having pendant carboxyl or amine groups. Subsequent reaction in the presence of a coupling agent: (1 ) links the amino-terminus of a peptide and a carboxyl group of the azide compound in the presence of a coupling agent; or (2) links the carboxyl-terminus of a peptide and an amide group of the azide compound. Accordingly, the reaction scheme in Figure 7 illustrates conjugation of a peptide targeting ligand to the azide compound via an amide linkage. As will be generally understood by persons having skill in the art, coupling agents useful in the reactions of schemes of Figure 7 include hydrogen peroxide, chlorine, bromine, iodine, peracids, periodate, hypochlorite, and the like.

[0167] Figures 8A and 8B illustrate examples of coupling reactions useful for synthesis of azide optical agents of the invention having specific targeting ligands. As shown in Figure 8A, the azide compound (1 ) in Figure 7 having a pendant carboxyl group is linked to octreotide, bombesin, cholecystokinin, bacterioenterotoxin and steroid targeting ligands via formation of an amide bond. As shown in Figure 8B, the azide compound (2) in Figure 7 having a pendant amine group is linked to octreotide, bombesin, cholecystokinin, bacterioenterotoxin and steroid targeting ligands via formation of an amide bond. As will be understood by a person having skill in the art, a variety of coupling agents are useful for linking the substituted phenyl to the targeting ligands including dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC), 1 -ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl) carbodiimide (EDC), benzotriazol-1-yl-oxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBOP), disuccinimdyl carbonate, N-hydroxysuccinimide, methylformamide, isobutylchloroformate, etc. As will be understood by one of skill in the art, the synthetic approaches shown in Figures 7, 8A and 8B are applicable to synthesis of other azide optical agents of the invention, including azide optical agents having formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60).

1.b.(v)(1) Preparation of Azide-FOLR1 -Antibody Conjugate

[0168] Preparation of an azide-antibody conjugate of formula (FX56) is shown in Scheme 2 below. A stock solution (3.2 mg in 400 mL of DMSO) of the succinimido ester (63 μΙ_) was added to the FOLR1-Ab solution (2.5 mg in 1 mL of pH 8.2 buffer) and the entire mixture was gently stirred at ambient temperature for 2 hours. Excess active ester and the hydrolyzed active ester were removed by ultrafiltration using 30,000 MW cut-off filter. The residue was re-suspended in PBS (pH 7.2) and filtered again using 30,000 MW cut-off filter. The washing process was repeated three more times. The residue after final wash was diluted with enough PBS to a final volume of 2 mL and was used as such for further studies.

[0169] Scheme 2

Anti-Folate Receptor 1

Specific Antibody (FOLRl -Ab)

pH 8.2 buffer

1.b.(v)(2) Preparation of Folic Acid-Azide Conjugate

[0170] Preparation of the folic acid-azide conjugate of formula (FX57) is shown in Scheme 3 below.

[0171] Scheme 3

[0172] iert-Butyl (3-(2-(2-(3-((3-azido-2,4,5-trifluoro-6- nitrophenyl)amino)propoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)propyl)carbamate (3). A brown solution of the azide 1 (0.354 g, 1.50 mmol) [see Mukai, T.; Kumagai, T.; Saiki, H.; Kawamura, Y. Photochemical behavior of cyclic imino ethers: the nitrogen-oxygen bond fission, syn-anti isomerization and cycoaddition reactions in the C:N-0 chromophore. J. Photochem. 1981 , 17, 365-368], mono-Boc- PEG-diamine 2 (0.500 g, 1.56 mmol), and Et ₃ N (0.250 mL, 1 .79 mmol) in anhyd CH ₃ CN (10 mL) was heated to 60°C and stirred overnight (ca. 14 h) under N ₂ . Removal of the solvent in vacuo gave a gummy residue, which upon automated flash chromatography over silica gel [40 g; CHCI ₃ to CHCI ₃ -MeOH (49:1 , v/v) gradient elution] afforded 3 (0.487 g, 57%) as an orange syrup: R _f 0.42 [CHCIs-MeOH (49:1 , v/v)]; ¹ H NMR (CDCI ₃ ) d 6.68 (br t, 1 H), 4.94 (br s, 1 H), 3.68-3.52 (m, 14 H), 3.22 (br q, J = 6.1 Hz, 2 H), 1 .90-1.86 (quintet, J = 6.1 Hz, 2 H), 1.78-1 .73 (quintet, J = 6.2 Hz, 2 H), 1.43 (s, 9 H); RP-LCMS (ESI) m/z 559.4 (M + Na) ⁺ , 537.5 (M + H) ⁺ [t _R = 4.61 min; UV (l _max ): PDA (200-600 nm; column: ThermoElectron Hypersil Gold C18 3 mm (4.6 mm ^χ 50 mm); gradient: 25-95%B/6 min (mobile phase A: 0.05% TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.05% TFA in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min]. HRMS (ESI) m/z calcd for C2i H ₃₁ F ₃ N ₆ 0 ₇ Na (M + Na) ⁺ 559.2099, found 559.2084; calcd for C ₂ i H ₃ 2F ₃ N ₆ 07 (M + H) ⁺ 537.2279, found 537.2272.

[0173] (S)-Methyl 1 -((3-azido-2,4,5-trifluoro-6-nitrophenyl)amino)-18-((iert- butoxycarbonyl)amino)-15-oxo-4,7,10-trioxa-14-azanonadecan-1 9-oate (6). (i) A light brown solution of Boc-compound 3 (0.268 g, 0.500 mmol) in anhyd dioxane (2 mL) was treated with 4 N HCI in dioxane (0.600 ml_, 2.40 mmol) and stirred for 1 h at r.t. in an atmosphere of N ₂ . The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, the brown viscous residue was co-evaporated with CH ₃ CN, and then dried overnight under high vacuum to give Λ/-(3-(2-(2-(3- aminopropoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)propyl)-3-azido-2,4,5-trifluoro-6 -nitroaniline as dihydrochloride salt (4; 0.256 g, quantitative): RP-LC/MS (ESI) m/z 437.3 (M + H) ⁺ [t _R = 5.01 min; UV (l _max ): PDA (200-600 nm; column: ThermoElectron Hypersil Gold C18 3 mm (4.6 mm * 50 mm); gradient: 5- 95%B/6 min (mobile phase A: 0.05% TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.05% TFA in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min].

[0175] (ii) To a brown solution of the above hydrochloride salt 4 (0.256 g, 0.500 mmol) in anyd DMF (5 ml_), DIPEA (0.190 ml_, 1.09 mmol) was added at ~0°C, and the reaction mixture was stirred for 15 min under N ₂ . Then Boc-L-glutamic acid σ-methyl ester (5; 0.125 g, 0.480 mmol), HOBt hydrate (20 wt% water; 0.090 g, 0.530 mmol), and EDC.HCI (0.102 g, 0.530 mmol) were added, and the reaction mixture was slowly warmed to r.t. and stirred overnight (ca. 16 h). Most of the DMF was removed under high vacuum and the dark slurry was partitioned between EtOAc (100 ml.) and H ₂ 0 (50 ml_). The EtOAc layer was successively washed with 0.50 M KHS0 ₄ , H ₂ 0, satd Na ₂ C0 ₃ , H ₂ 0, and brine, and dried over Na ₂ S0 ₄ . Removal of the solvent in vacuo gave a dark brown residue (0.33 g), which upon automated flash chromatography over silica gel [40 g; CHCI ₃ to CHCIs-MeOH (19:1 , v/v) gradient elution] afforded 6 (0.172 g, 53%) as a brownish yellow gum: R _f 0.40 [CHCI ₃ -MeOH (19:1 , v/v)]; ¹ H NMR (CDCI ₃ ) d 6.69 (br t, 1 H), 6.46 (br s, 1 H), 5.40 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 1 H), 4.22-4.30 (m, 1 H), 3.73 (s, 3 H), 3.68-3.52 (m, 14 H), 3.38-3.34 (m, 2 H), 2.29-2.12 (m, 3 H), 1.98-1 .91 (m, 1 H), 1.90-1.86 (quintet, J = 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 1 .80-1 .75 (quintet, J = 6.1 Hz, 2 H), 1.44 (s, 9 H); RP-LC/MS (ESI) m/z 680.6 (M + H) ⁺ [t _R = 4.35 min; UV (l _max ): PDA (200-600 nm; column: ThermoElectron Hypersil Gold C18 3 mm (4.6 mm * 50 mm); gradient: 25-95%B/6 min (mobile phase A: 0.05% TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.05% TFA in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min]. HRMS (ESI) m/z calcd for for C ₂ 7H ₄₁ F ₃ N ₇ Oio (M + H) ⁺ 680.2862, found 680.2850.

[0176] (S)-Methyl 1 -((3-azido-2,4,5-trifluoro-6-nitrophenyl)amino)-18-(4-(W-((2 - (((dimethylamino)methylene)amino)-4-oxo-3,4-dihydropteridin- 6- yl)methyl)formamido)benzamido)-15-oxo-4,7,10-trioxa-14-azano nadecan-19-oate (9). (i) A brown solution of Boc-compound 6 (0.170 g, 0.250 mmol) in anhyd dioxane (2 mL) was treated with 4 N HCI in dioxane (0.500 mL, 2.00 mmol) and stirred for 1 h at r.t. in an atmosphere of N ₂ . The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, the brown viscous residue was co-evaporated with CH ₃ CN (2 x 10 mL), and then dried overnight under high vacuum to give (S)-methyl 18- amino-1 -((3-azido-2, 4, 5-trifluoro-6-nitrophenyl)amino)-15-oxo-4,7, 10-trioxa-14-azanonadecan-19- oate as dihydrochloride salt (7; 0.174 g, >100%): RP-LC/MS (ESI) m/z 580.5 (M + H) ⁺ [t _R = 3.63 min; UV (l _max ): PDA (200-600 nm; column: ThermoElectron Hypersil Gold C18 3 mm (4.6 mm ^χ 50 mm); gradient: 25-95%B/6 min (mobile phase A: 0.05% TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.05% TFA in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min].

[0177]

[0178] (ii) To an orange solution of the above hydrochloride salt 7 (0.174 g, -0.250 mmol) in anyd DMF (5 mL), 4-methylmorpholine (0.060 mL, 0.550 mmol) was added at ~0 °C , and the reaction mixture was stirred for 15 min under N ₂ . The cooling bath was removed and protected pteroic acid 8 (0.099 g, 0.250 mmol) [see Moser, R.; Schibli, R.; Miiller, C. M.; Groehn, V.; Michel, U.; Sparr, C; Mindt, T. L. Folate-conjugates and corresponding metal-chelate complexes for use in diagnostic imaging and radiotherapy. PCT Appl., WO 2008/125618 A1 ] and DMTMM (0.076 g, 0.275 mmol) were added, and the reaction mixture was stirred overnight (ca. 18 h). At this stage, more DMTMM (0.025 g, 0.090 mmol) was added and the reaction was continued for another 24 h under N ₂ atmosphere. Most of the DMF was removed under high vacuum and the residue was partitioned between CHCI ₃ (30 mL) and H ₂ 0 (15 mL). The CHCI ₃ layer was washed with brine (15 mL) and dried over Na ₂ S0 ₄ . Removal of the solvent in vacuo gave a gummy residue (0.304 g), which upon automated flash chromatography over silica gel [40 g; CHCI ₃ to CHCI ₃ -MeOH (23:2, v/v) gradient elution] furnished 9 (0.146 g, 61 %) as a brown gum: R _f 0.40 [CHCI ₃ -MeOH (9:1 , v/v)]; ¹ H NMR (CDCI ₃ ) d 9.41 (br, 1 H), 8.95 (s, 1 H), 8.81-8.68 (m, 2 H), 8.34 (d, J = 6.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.93 (dd, J = 8.6, 1.7 Hz, 2 H), 7.37 (dd, J = 8.4, 1 .8 Hz, 2 H), 6.69 (br s, 1 H), 6.66 (br s, 1 H), 5.33 (s, 2 H), 4.62-4.58 (m, 1 H), 3.74 (s, 3 H), 3.65-3.51 (m, 14 H), 3.45-3.27 (m, 2 H), 3.23 (s, 3 H), 3.16 (s, 3 H), 2.45-2.29 (m, 2 H), 2.25-2.13 (m, 2 H), 1 .88-1.73 (m, 4 H); RP-LC/MS (ESI) m/z 957.7 (M + H) ⁺ [t _R = 3.78 min; UV (l _max ): PDA (200-600 nm; column: ThermoElectron Hypersil Gold C18 3 mm (4.6 mm ^χ 50 mm); gradient: 25-95%B/6 min (mobile phase A: 0.05% TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.05% TFA in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min]. HRMS (ESI) m/z calcd for for C ₄ oH ₄₇ F ₃ N ₁₄ OnNa (M + Na) ⁺ 979.3393, found 979.3381 ; calcd for for C ₄ oH ₄₈ F ₃ N ₁₄ On (M + H) ⁺ 957.3574, found 957.3570.

[0179] (S)-18-(4-(((2-Amino-4-oxo-3,4-dihydropteridin-6-yl)methyl)a mino)benzamido)-1 -((3- azido-2, 4, 5-trifluoro-6-nitrophenyl)amino)-15-oxo-4,7,10-trioxa-14-aza nonadecan-19-oic acid (FX57). (i) To a yellow solution of 9 (0.145 g, 0.152 mmol) in dioxane (2 mL), 4 N aq HCI (2 mL) was added, and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight (ca. 14 h) at r.t. under N ₂ . The reaction mixture was cooled to ~0°C, diluted with water, and the pH was adjusted to ~5. The precipitate was collected by vacuum filtration , washed with water, and then dried overnight under high vacuum to give (S)-methyl 18-(4-(((2-amino-4-oxo-3,4-dihydropteridin-6- yl)methyl)amino)benzamido)-1 -((3-azido-2, 4, 5-trifluoro-6-nitrophenyl)amino)-15-oxo-4,7, 10-trioxa- 14-azanonadecan-19-oate (10; 0.087 g, 65%) as an orange solid: RP-LC/MS (ESI) m/z 874.5 (M + H) ⁺ [t _R = 3.71 min; UV (l _max ): PDA (200-600 nm; column: ThermoElectron Hypersil Gold C18 3 mm (4.6 mm ^χ 50 mm); gradient: 25-95%B/6 min (mobile phase A: 0.05% TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.05% TFA in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min].

[0181] (ii) The above methyl ester 10 (0.087 g, 0.010 mmol) was suspended in 1 N LiOH (2 ml.) and stirred at r.t. in an atmosphere of N ₂ . The material slowly went into solution, and after 1 h, the pH of the turbid reaction mixture was adjusted to ~4 by formic acid at ~0 °C. The resulting yellow precipitate was separated from solution by centrifugation. The precipitate was washed with H ₂ 0 (2 x 5 imL) and CH ₃ CN (3 imL), separated each time by centrifugation, and dried under high vacuum to give folate-conjugate (FX57) (0.071 g, 83%; 54% for two steps) as a brownish orange solid: RP-LC/HRMS calcd for for ΟκΗ^Ν^Οιο (M + H) ⁺ 860.3046, found 860.3052 [t _R = 9.67 min; UV (lmax): 280 nm; column: Phenomenex Luna 5 mm C18(2) 100 A 250 * 4.6 mm; gradient: 20%B/0 min, 20%B/1 min, 95%B/12 min, 95%B/20 min (mobile phase A: 0.05% TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min].

1.b.(v)(3) Preparation of Folic Acid-Pyrazine-Azide Conjugate

[0182] Folic acid-azide conjugate (FX58) incorporating a pyrazine marker was synthesized according to Scheme 4 depicted below.

[0183] Scheme 4

[0184] W ² -(2-Aminoethyl)-A^-(2-((3-azido-2,4,5-trifluoro-6-nitr ophenyl)amino)ethyl)-3,^ bis(propylamino)pyrazine-2,5-dicarboxamide (3). To a solution of A/ ² ,A/ ⁵ -bis(2-aminoethyl)-3,6- bis(propylamino)pyrazine-2,5-dicarboxamide TFA salt (1 , 0.447 g, 0.423 mmol) [see, Poreddy, A. R.; Asmelash, B.; Neumann, W. L; Dorshow, R. B. A highly efficient method for the N-alkylation of aminopyrazines: Synthesis of hydrophilic red fluorescent dyes. Synthesis 2010, 2383-2392.] in anhyd CH ₃ CN (18 ml_), was added DIPEA (0.450 ml_, 2.58 mmol) at ~0 °C, and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min under Ar. The cooling bath was removed and the azide 2 (0.100 g, 0.424 mmol) [see, Mukai, T.; Kumagai, T.; Saiki, H.; Kawamura, Y. Photochemical behavior of cyclic imino ethers: the nitrogen-oxygen bond fission, syn-anti isomerization and cycoaddition reactions in the C:N-0 chromophore. J. Photochem. 1981 , 17, 365-368.] was added. After stirring the reaction mixture for 1 h at r.t., most of the CH ₃ CN was removed in vacuo. The residue obtained was dissolved in CHCI ₃ (150 imL), washed with H ₂ 0 and brine (20 imL each), and dried over Na ₂ S0 ₄ . Removal of the solvent in vacuo gave 0.420 g of the residue, which was subjected to purification by preparative HPLC [column: Waters XBrdige™ Prep C18 OBD™ 5 μτη 30 * 150 mm; UV (2 _max ): PDA (200-800 nm); flow: 50 mL/min; gradient: 20-95% B/12 min (mobile phase A: 0.1 % TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.1 % TFA in CH ₃ CN)]. The product containing fractions were combined, most of the CH ₃ CN was removed in vacuo, and the remaining solution was freeze-dried to give 3 (0.025 g) as a red powder: RP-LCMS (ESI) m/z 605.4 (M + Na) ⁺ , 583.6 (M + H) ⁺ [t _R = 4.54 min; column: ThermoElectron Hypersil Gold C18 3 μτη (4.6 mm ^χ 50 mm); λ^: PDA (250- 600 nm; gradient: 5-95%B/6 min (mobile phase A: 0.05% TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.05% TFA in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min].

[0185] (S)-2-(4-(((2-Amino-4-oxo-3,4-dihydropteridin-6-yl)methyl)am ino)benzamido)-5-((2- (5-((2-((3-azido-2,4,5-trifluoro-6-nitrophenyl)amino)ethyl)c arbamoyl)-3,6- bis(propylamino)pyrazine-2-carboxamido)ethyl)amino)-5-oxopen tanoic acid (5). To a solution of the above amine 3 (0.025 g, -0.043 mmol) in anyd DMSO (1 .5 ml_), DIPEA (0.004 ml.) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min under Ar. Then folic acid (4; 0.019 g, 0.043 mmol), HOBt hydrate (20 wt% water; 0.007 g, 0.041 mmol), and EDC.HCI (0.008 g, 0.042 mmol) were added, and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight (ca. 21 h) at r.t under Ar. The reaction mixture was freeze-dried and the residue was triturated with CH ₃ CN-Et ₂ 0 (2 x 6 imL; 1 :1 , v/v) to give 0.055 g of the crude product. It was then dissolved in DMSO (6 imL) and subjected to purification by preparative HPLC [column: Waters XBrdige™ Prep C18 OBD™ 5 μτη 30 * 150 mm; UV (2 _max ): PDA (200-800 nm); flow: 50 mL/min; gradient: 20-95% B/14 min (mobile phase A: 0.1 % TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.1 % TFA in CH ₃ CN)]. The product containing fractions were combined, most of the CH ₃ CN was removed in vacuo, and the remaining suspension was freeze- dried to give folate-conjugate (FX58) (0.005 g) as a red gummy solid: RP-LC/HRMS calcd for C ₄₁ H ₄₇ F ₃ N ₁₉ 0 ₉ (M + H) ⁺ 1006.3751 , found 1006.3784 [t _R = 10.57 min; UV (k _max ) 280 nm; column: Vydac 218 TP 5 μτη C18 250 * 4.6 mm; gradient: 5%B/0 min, 50%B/5 min, 98%B/15 min, 98%B/20 min (mobile phase A: 0.1 % formic acid in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.1 % formic acid in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min].

1.b.(v)(4) Preparation of Linaclotide-Pyrazine-Azide Conjugate

[0186] The Linaclotide-azide conjugate of formula (FX59) incorporating a pyrazine marker was synthesized according to Scheme 5 depicted below.

[0187] Scheme 5

1

[0188] Methyl 3-(3,6-diamino-5-((2-((ieri-butoxycarbonyl)amino)ethyl)carba moyl)pyrazine- 2-carboxamido)propanoate (4). A colorless solution of /3-alanine methyl ester hydrochloride (3,

I .40 g, 10.0 mmol) in anhyd DMF (100 mL) was stirred with DIPEA (1 .92 mL, 1 1 .0 mmol) for 15 min in an atmosphere of argon. Then 3,6-diaminopyrazine-2,5-dicarboxylic acid (1 , 0.991 g, 5.00 mmol) [see, Shirai, K.; Yanagisawa, A.; Takahashi, H.; Fukunishi, K.; Matsuoka, M. Synthesis and fluorescent properties of 2,5-diamino-3,6-dicyanopyrazine dyes. Dyes and Pigments 1998, 39, 49- 68], A/-Boc-ethylenediamine (2, 0.801 g, 5.00 mmol), and HOBt.H ₂ 0 (1.69 g, 1 1.0 mmol) were added. The orange reaction mixture was stirred for 15 min before the addition of EDC.HCI (2.1 1 g,

I I .0 mmol), and the resulting somewhat lighter orange suspension was stirred at rt overnight (ca. 16 h). Most of the DMF was removed under high vacuum and the dark slurry was partitioned between EtOAc (200 mL) and H ₂ 0 (100 mL). The aqueous layer was further extracted with EtOAc (2 ^χ 100 mL), the combined organic extracts were washed with H ₂ 0 (2 ^χ 100 mL), and then dried Na ₂ S0 ₄ . Removal of the solvent in vacuo gave a brownish orange gummy solid (3.25 g), which upon automated flash chromatography over silica gel [80 g; CHCI ₃ to CHCI ₃ -MeOH (49:1 , v/v) gradient elution] furnished 4 (0.690 g, 32%) as an orange powder: R _f = 0.37 [CHCI ₃ -MeOH (19:1 , v/v)]; ¹ H NMR (CDCI ₃ ) δ 8.17 (t, J = 6.3 Hz, 1 H), 8.10 (br, 1 H), 6.00 (br s, 4 H), 4.98 (br, 1 H), 3.72 (s, 3 H), 3.69 (q, J = 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 3.52 (q, J = 5.9 Hz, 2 H), 3.41-3.33 (br q, 2 H), 2.65 (t, J = 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 1 .43 (s, 9 H); ¹³ C NMR (CDCI ₃ ) S 172.7, 165.9, 165.3, 156.4, 146.54, 146.5, 126.9, 126.8, 79.7, 51.9, 40.4, 39.9, 34.7, 33.9, 28.4; RP-LC/MS (ESI) m/z 426.5 (M + H) ⁺ [t _R = 3.67 min; UV ^ _max ): PDA (250-600 nm; column: ThermoElectron Hypersil Gold C18 3 μτη (4.6 mm ^χ 50 mm); gradient: 15-95%B/6 min (mobile phase A: 0.05% TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.05% TFA in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min]. HRMS (ESI) m/z calcd for for Ci ₇ H2 ₇ N ₇ 0 ₆ Na (M +

Na) ⁺ 448.1915, found 448.1912; calcd for C ₁₇ H2 ₈ N ₇ 0 ₆ (M + H) ⁺ 426.2096, found 426.2095.

[0189] Methyl 3-(5-((2-((iert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)ethyl)carbamoyl)-3,6- bis(propylamino)pyrazine-2-carboxamido)propanoate (5). To a partially-dissolved yellow suspension of bisamide 4 (0.638 g, 1.50 mmol) in anhyd DCE (30 mL), propionaldehyde (0.433 mL, 6.00 mmol) and HOAc (0.350 mL, 6.07 mmol) were added with stirring at ~0 °C under argon atmosphere. The resulting reddish orange suspension was allowed to stir for few minutes before the addition of Na(OAc) ₃ BH (1.27 g, 6.00 mmol) in small portions over a 10 min period. The reddish reaction mixture was slowly allowed to warm to r.t. and stirred overnight (ca. 16 h) in an atmosphere of argon. The reaction was quenched by a slow addition of satd NaHC0 ₃ (25 mL) at 0 °C. The biphasic mixture was stirred for 30 min and extracted with CHCI ₃ (3 x 25 mL). The combined organic extracts were successively washed with H ₂ 0 ( ^χ 2) and brine (30 mL portions) and dried over Na ₂ S0 ₄ . Removal of the solvent gave 0.740 g of the crude product, which upon automated flash chromatography over silica gel [80 g; CHCI ₃ to CHCI ₃ -EtOAc (97:3, v/v) gradient elution] afforded pure 5 (0.625 g, 82%) as a red solid: R _f = 0.31 [CHCI ₃ -EtOAc (9:1 , v/v)]; ¹ H NMR (CDCI ₃ ) 8.32 (t, J = 6.3 Hz, 1 H), 8.13 (br, 1 H), 7.78 (t, J = 6.3 Hz, 1 H), 7.77 (t, J = 6.3 Hz, 1 H), 4.89 (br, 1 H), 3.71 (s, 3 H), 3.69 (q, J = 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 3.53 (q, J = 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 3.39-3.34 (m, 6 H), 2.64 (t, J = 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 1.70-1 .46 (2 overlapping sextets, 4 H), 1.42 (s, 9 H), 1.02 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 3 H), 1.01 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 3 H) ; ¹³ C NMR (CDCI ₃ ) 172.6, 166.9, 166.2, 156.3, 146.03, 146.0, 126.2, 126.0, 79.6, 51 .8, 42.9, 40.5, 39.8, 34.6, 34.0, 28.3, 22.81 , 22.8, 1 1 .84, 1 1.8; RP-LC/MS (ESI) m/z 532.4 (M + Na) ⁺ , 510.5 (M + H) ⁺ [t _R = 4.58 min; UV (k _max ) PDA (250-600 nm; column: ThermoElectron Hypersil Gold C18 3 μτη (4.6 mm ^χ 50 mm); gradient: 25-95%B/6 min (mobile phase A: 0.05% TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.05% TFA in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min]. HRMS (ESI) m/z calcd for C ₂₃ H ₃₉ N ₇ 0 ₆ Na (M + Na) ⁺ 532.2854, found 532.2862; calcd for for C ₂₃ H ₄₀ N ₇ O ₆ (M + H) ⁺ 510.3035, found 510.3042.

[0190] Methyl 3-(5-((2-aminoethyl)carbamoyl)-3,6-bis(propylamino)pyrazine- 2- carboxamido)propanoate TFA salt (6). To a red solution of 5 (0.350 g, 0.687 mmol) in anhydrous CH ₂ CI ₂ (3 mL), was added TFA (3 mL) carefully and the resulting yellow solution was stirred at r.t. for 1 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, the residue was co- evaporated with CH ₂ CI ₂ (3 x 25 mL), and then dried overnight under high vacuum to give TFA salt 6 (0.590 g, 99% for tetra-TFA salt) as a red viscous residue: RP-LC/MS (ESI) m/z 410.4 (M + H) ⁺ [f _R = 3.95 min; UV ^ _max ): PDA (250-600 nm; column: ThermoElectron Hypersil Gold C18 3 μτη (4.6 mm ^χ 50 mm); gradient: 10-95%B/6 min (mobile phase A: 0.05% TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.05% TFA in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min].

[0191] Methyl 3-(5-((2-((3-azido-2,4,5-trifluoro-6-nitrophenyl)amino)ethyl )carbamoyl)-3,6- bis(propylamino)pyrazine-2-carboxamido)propanoate (8). To a red solution of the above TFA salt 6 (0.590 g, 0.682 mmol) in anhyd CH ₃ CN (9 mL), was added Et ₃ N (0.570 mL, 4.09 mmol) at ~0 °C, and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min in an atmosphere of N ₂ . The cooling bath was removed and a solution of the azide 7 (0.160 g, 0.678 mmol) in anhyd CH ₃ CN (1 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was slowly heated to 80 °C and stirred for 2 h under N ₂ . After cooling to room temperature, it was diluted with CHCI ₃ (50 mL), and washed with H ₂ 0 (* 2) and brine (25 mL portions) and dried over Na ₂ S0 ₄ . Removal of the solvent in vacuo gave 0.452 g of the crude product, which was purified by automated flash chromatography over silica gel [40 g; CHCI ₃ to CHCI ₃ -EtOAc (49: 1 , v/v) gradient elution] to give 8 (0.226 g, 53%) as a red viscous residue: R _f = 0.43 [CHCI ₃ -MeOH (99:1 , v/v)]; ¹ H NMR (CDCI ₃ ) 8.33 (t, J = 6.3 Hz, 1 H), 7.98 (br t, 1 H), 7.79 (t, J = 5.3 Hz, 1 H), 7.66 (t, J = 5.5 Hz, 1 H), 6.64 (br t, 1 H), 3.72 (s, 3 H), 3.71-3.60 (m, 6 H), 3.36 (q, J = 6.5 Hz, 2 H), 3.30 (q, J = 6.4 Hz, 2 H), 2.64 (t, J = 6.1 Hz, 2 H), 1 .71-1.62 (m, 4 H), 1 .02 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 3 H), 1 .00 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 3 H); RP-LC/MS (ESI) m/z 626.4 (M + H) ⁺ [i _R = 4.14 min; UV ^ _max ): PDA (250-600 nm; column: ThermoElectron Hypersil Gold C18 3 μτη (4.6 mm ^χ 50 mm); gradient: 50-95%B/6 min (mobile phase A: 0.05% TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.05% TFA in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min]. HRMS (ESI) m/z calcd for C ₂₄ H ₃₁ F ₃ Nn0 ₆ (M + H) ⁺ 626.2405, found 626.2396.

[0192] 3-(5-((2-((3-Azido-2,4,5-trifluoro-6-nitrophenyl)amino)ethyl )carbamoyl)-3,6- bis(propylamino)pyrazine-2-carboxamido)propanoic acid (9). To a red solution of the methyl ester 8 (0.163 g, 0.260 mmol) in THF (5 mL), was added 1 N LiOH (0.286 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at r.t. in an atmosphere of N ₂ . Most of the THF was removed in vacuo, the residue was suspended in H ₂ 0 (15 mL), and acidified by the addition of 1 N HCI (0.70 mL) at ~0 °C. The product was extracted into CHCI ₃ (3 ^χ 50 mL) and the combined extracts were washed with H ₂ 0 (2 x 50 mL). After drying the CHCI ₃ layer over Na ₂ S0 ₄ , solvent was removed in vacuo, and the viscous residue was further dried overnight under high vacuum to give the acid 9 (0.159 g, 100%) as a red foam: ¹ H NMR (CDCI ₃ ) £8.34 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.97 (br t, 1 H), 7.76 (br, 1 H), 7.65 (br, 1 H), 6.62 (br, 1 H), 3.72-3.60 (m, 6 H), 3.34-3.29 (m, 4 H), 2.71 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 1.69-1.60 (sextet, J = 7.2 Hz, 4 H), 1.00 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 3 H), 0.99 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 3 H); RP-LC/MS (ESI) m/z 612.4 (M + H) ⁺ [t _R = 3.36 min; UV ^ _max ): PDA (250-600 nm; column: ThermoElectron Hypersil Gold C18 3 μτη (4.6 mm ^χ 50 mm); gradient: 50-95%B/6 min (mobile phase A: 0.05% TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.05% TFA in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min]. HRMS (ESI) m/z calcd for C23H29F3N11O6 (M + H) ⁺ 612.2249, found 612.2240.

[0193] Linaclotide conjugate (FX59). (i) To a red solution of the acid 9 (0.055 g, 0.090 mmol) and N-hydroxysuccinimide (0.013 g, 0.1 13 mmol) in THF (2 ml_), was added DCC (0.023 g, 0.1 12 mmol) at ~0 °C while stirring in an atmosphere of N ₂ . The heterogeneous reaction mixture was slowly allowed to warm to r.t. and stirred overnight (ca. 16 h) under N ₂ . The precipitated dicyclohexylurea was removed by filtration, the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo, and the residue was further dried overnight under high vacuum to give 2,5-dioxopyrrolidin-1 -yl 3-(5-((2-((3-azido- 2,4,5-trifluoro-6-nitrophenyl)amino)ethyl)carbamoyl)-3,6-bis (propylamino)pyrazine-2- carboxamido)propanoate (10, 0.093 g) as a dark red solid: RP-LC/MS (ESI) m/z 709.4 (M + H) ⁺ [t _R = 3.78 min; UV ^ _max ): PDA (250-600 nm; column: ThermoElectron Hypersil Gold C18 3 μτη (4.6 mm ^χ 50 mm); gradient: 50-95%B/6 min (mobile phase A: 0.05% TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.05% TFA in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min].

[0194]

[0195] (ii) To a colorless solution of linaclotide (11 , 0.038 g, 0.025 mmol) in anhyd DMF (1 ml_), was added 4-methylmorpholine (0.027 ml_, 0.250 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred for 15 min in an atmosphere of N ₂ . Then the above crude NHS-ester 10 (0.028 g, -0.0275 mmol) was added and the resulting red solution was allowed to stir for 5 d at r.t. under N ₂ . The reaction mixture was as such subjected to purification by preparative HPLC [column: Waters XBrdige™ Prep C18 OBD™ 5 μτη 30 * 150 mm; UV (2 _max ): PDA (200-800 nm); flow: 50 mL/min; gradient: 30-95% B/12 min (mobile phase A: 0.1 % TFA in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.1 % TFA in CH ₃ CN)]. The product containing fractions were combined, most of the CH ₃ CN was removed in vacuo, and the remaining solution was freeze-dried to give the conjugate (FX59) (0.012 g, 23%) as a red powder: RP-LC/HRMS calcd for C ₈₂ H ₁₀ 6F ₃ N ₂₆ O ₂₆ S ₆ (M + H) ⁺ 21 19.6042, found 21 19.61 17 [t _R = 18.24 min; UV ^ _max ): 280 nm; column: Halo C18 2.1 ^χ 150 mm 2.7 μτη; gradient: 5%B/0 min, 5%B/5 min, 95%B/10 min, 95%B/20 min (mobile phase A: 0.1 % formic acid in H ₂ 0; mobile phase B: 0.1 % formic acid in CH ₃ CN); flow: 1 mL/min].

I .e. Light Activated Type 1 Photosensitzers for Phototherapy

1 ,c.(i) In vitro cell viability assay

[0196] A human myeloid leukemia cell line U937 (American Type Culture Collection, Rockville, MD) was cultured in RPMI-1640 medium supplemented with 10% fetal calf serum (FCS). For determination of metabolic activity (WST-1 assay) 4 X I0 ⁴ (U937) cells/well were seeded into 96- well microplates, and incubated for 1-2 hours before adding the compounds. The incubation steps were always carried out at 37 °C in a humidified 5% C0 ₂ atmosphere. Compounds were prepared by dissolving them in 100% DMSO at a concentration of 8mM. The compounds were serially diluted such that the final percentage of DMSO was less than 0.5 % in all the concentrations prepared. The diluted compounds were then added to cells in triplicates and further incubated for 1 h at 37°C under dark conditions. Cells cultivated in plain medium without compound served as control. Unexposed plates (time point = 0 min) also served as a control to evaluate the cyto-toxicity of the compounds. After 1 hour of incubation the plates were irradiated by placing them under a long wavelength UV lamp (UVP LLC, CA) with maximum emission between 400 nm and 500 nm. The plates were irradiated for a period of 5, 10 and 20 minutes. The temperature at the surface of the plate never exceeded 37 °C. Following the photoactivation, cells were incubated for 24 h at 37 °C in dark conditions. At 22 h tetrazolium salt WST-1 (4-[3-(4-lodophenyl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-2H-5- tetrazolio]-1 , 3-benzene disulfonate (Roche Diagnostics, USA)] was added to each well of the plate. After 2 hours of incubation the metabolic activity was quantified by absorbance

measurements at 480nm and 600nm (Synergy 4, BioTEK Instruments, VT, USA). The percent viability was calculated as ([OD value of treated cells/mean OD value of controlcells] X 100%). Each compound was tested for a minimum of three times.

1.c.(ii) Viability of leukemia cells exposed to photosensitizer and light

[0197] It should be noted at the outset that the solvent, dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), alone exhibited cytotoxic effect only at high concentration (ca. 100 imM) and long exposure to light (> 20 minutes) (data not shown). The U397 leukemia cell viability profiles of azide photosensitizers having formula (FX34), (FX35), (FX36) (FX37), and (FX41 ) are shown in Figs. 2 to 5 and 10-12. Photoexcitation of these compounds generates reactive species, such as nitrene reactive

intermediates. All three compounds exhibited concentration-dependent and light exposure time- dependent decrease in cell viability.

[0198] A classes of Type 1 photosensitizer containing fragile -N=N=N bonds that produce reactive intermediates upon photoexcitation were prepared and tested in vitro. U937 leukemia cells were incubated with the photosensitizer at various concentrations and irradiated with 325- 425 nm light at various durations. The results show that all the photosensitizers examined caused selective cell death in both time- and concentration-dependent manner. In vitro studies with nonselective compounds (FX34), (FX35), (FX36), and (FX37) successfully demonstrate that the cell death is achievable via photoexcitation with visible light. The results show that all the

photosensitizers caused cell death compared to the controls when exposed to both the

photosensitizers and light. The differences in activity between the compounds can be partly attributed to the efficiency of light absorption by the photosensitizer, because, in this study, the wavelength, power, and intensity of the light source were not optimized for the respective compounds. 1.c.(iii) Cell Viability Measurements

[0199] A general procedure is carried out for measuring cell viability upon exposure of tumor cells to azide photosensitizers having formula (FX34), (FX35), (FX36), (FX37) and (FX41 ), and exposure to light. The absorption maxima for selected azide compounds are provided in Table 1. Cell viability assessment is carried out using human myeloid leukemia U937 cell line by the standard WST-1 assay. In this procedure, U397 Luekemia cells (0.5 x 10 ⁶ ) are plated in standard T-25 cell culture flasks, and are exposed to four controls and a series of test conditions corresponding to a range of azide photosensitizer compounds and concentrations.

[0200] Table 1 : Absorption Maxima for Azide Photosensitizers

[0201]

[0202] Azide photosensitizers having Formula (FX34), (FX35), (FX36), (FX37) and (FX41 ) are dissolved in DMSO at an initial concentration of about 8 mM and was diluted with water to the final desired value such that the amount of DMSO exposed to the cells is below 0.5%. The cells are

o

incubated at 37 C with various concentrations the azide photosensitizers for about 30 minutes prior to the exposure of light. The cells are irradiated at 5, 10 and 20 minute durations. It should be noted that in the present study, the light source is not optimized with respect to power and wavelength. The viability of cells is assessed after 24 hours following light exposure. Once exposure is complete, the cells are processed to determine percent viability using Hank's

Balanced Salt Solution (HBSS), Trypan blue stain, and a hemacytometer to count live and dead cells. The number of viable cells is determined and percent viability is determined

Percent Viability = No. of Viable Cells Counted x 100

Total No. of Cells Counted

Viability measurements are analyzed to provide VC ₅₀ /2o values which is defined as the

concentration at which 50% decrease in cell viability is observed when the cells are exposed to light and the photosensitizer for 20 minutes.

[0203] Figure 6 provides cell viability results for control conditions (Control 4, no photosensitzer, DMSO, light) wherein the cells are exposed to light and dimethyl sulfoxide. As shown in Figure 6, DMSO toxicity is observed only at the highest concentrations of DMSO. Cells are incubated without DMSO (0 μΜ) and with DMSO at concentrations of 3 imM, 6 imM, and 12 mM. For the results in Figure 6, the cells were exposed to light from a B-100SP High Intensity Lamp for 0, 5, and 20 minutes. As shown in Figure 6, 100% of the cells are viable with conditions of 0 mM DMSO and 3 mM DMSO for light exposure for 5 minutes and 20 minutes. As shown in Figure 6, for conditions of 6 mM DMSO and no light exposure, light exposure for 5 minutes, and light exposure for 20 minutes, at least 94% of the cells are viable. As shown in Figure 6, for conditions of 12 mM DMSO and no light exposure, and for light exposure for 5 minutes, at least 95% of cells were viable; and for light exposure for 20 minutes, at least 78% of cells are viable.

[0204] Figure 2 provides cell viability results for test conditions wherein cells are exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX34) for concentrations of 0.78 μΜ, 1.56 μΜ and 3.13 μΜ. The cell viability experiments with compound (FX34) exhibit concentration-dependent and light exposure time-dependent decrease in cell viability. As shown in Figure 2, the viability of cells in contact with compound (FX34) decreases dramatically upon exposure to light over the range of 5 minutes to 20 minutes. Cells are incubated with compound (FX34) at concentrations of 0.78 μΜ, 1.56 μΜ and 3.13 μΜ. As shown in Figure 2, cells have at least 100% viability at concentrations of 0.78 μΜ, 1.56 μΜ and 3.13 μΜ with no exposure to light. In the presence of 0.78 μΜ compound (FX34), cells have at least 100% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, at least 100% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 50% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 1 .56 μΜ azide photosensitizer, cells have at least 100% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, about 70% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 25% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 3.13 μΜ azide photosensitizer, cells have about 100% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, about 50% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 20% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. The cell viability results yield a VC ₅₀ /2o value of 2 μΜ for the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX34).

[0205] Figure 3 provides cell viability results for test conditions wherein cells are exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX36) for concentrations of 31.25 μΜ, 62.5 μΜ, 125 μΜ and 250μΜ. The cell viability experiments with compound (FX36) exhibit concentration- dependent and light exposure time-dependent decrease in cell viability. As shown in Figure 3, the viability of cells in contact with compound (FX36) decreases dramatically upon exposure to light over the range of 5 minutes to 20 minutes. Cells are incubated with compound (FX36) at concentrations of 31.25 μΜ, 62.5 μΜ, 125 μΜ and 250μΜ. As shown in Figure 3, cells have at least 100% viability at concentrations of 31.25 μΜ, 62.5 μΜ, 125 μΜ and 250μΜ with no exposure to light. In the presence of 31.25 μΜ compound (FX36), cells have at least 100% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, at least 100% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 65% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 62.5 μΜ azide photosensitizer, cells have at least 100% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, about 90% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 35% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 125 μΜ azide photosensitizer, cells have at least 100% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, about 65% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 30% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 250 μΜ azide photosensitizer, cells have about 55% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, about 35% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 20% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. The cell viability results yield a VC50/20 value of 8 μΜ for the azide photosensitizer having Formula (FX36).

[0206] Figure 4 provides cell viability results for test conditions wherein cells are exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX35) for concentrations of 31.25 μΜ, 62.5 μΜ and 125 μΜ. The cell viability experiments with compound (FX35) exhibit concentration-dependent and light exposure time-dependent decrease in cell viability. As shown in Figure 4, the viability of cells in contact with compound (FX35) decreases dramatically upon exposure to light over the range of 5 minutes to 20 minutes. Cells are incubated with compound (FX35) at concentrations of 31 .25 μΜ, 62.5 μΜ and 125 μΜ. As shown in Figure 4, cells have at least 100% viability at concentrations of 31.25 μΜ, 62.5 μΜ and 125 μΜ with no exposure to light. In the presence of 31 .25 μΜ compound (FX35), cells have at least 100% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, about 98% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 38% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 62.5 μΜ azide photosensitizer, cells have about 90% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, about 50% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 20% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 125 μΜ azide photosensitizer, cells have about 20% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, about 18% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 15% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. The cell viability results yield a VC50/20 value of 5 μΜ for the azide photosensitizer having Formula (FX35).

[0207] Figure 5 provides cell viability results for test conditions wherein cells are exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX37) for concentrations of 2.5 μΜ, 10 μΜ and 20 μΜ. The cell viability experiments with compound (FX37) exhibit concentration-dependent and light exposure time-dependent decrease in cell viability. As shown in Figure 5, the viability of cells in contact with compound (FX37) decreases dramatically upon exposure to light over the range of 5 minutes to 20 minutes. Cells are incubated with compound (FX37) at concentrations of 2.5 μΜ, 10 μΜ and 20 μΜ. As shown in Figure 5, cells have at least 100% viability at concentrations of 2.5 μΜ, 10 μΜ and 20 μΜ with no exposure to light. In the presence of 2.5 μΜ compound (FX37), cells have about 92% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, about 92% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and at least 100% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 10 μΜ azide photosensitizer, cells have about 90% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, about 75% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 78% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 20 μΜ azide photosensitizer, cells have about 50% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, about 42% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 30% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. The cell viability results yield a VC50/20 value of 15 μΜ for the azide photosensitizer having Formula (FX37).

[0208] Figure 10 provides comparative cell viability results for test conditions wherein cells are exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX36) or (FX41 ) for photosensitizer concentrations of 10 μΜ and 20 μΜ. The cell viability experiments with compound (FX36) and (FX41 ) exhibit concentration-dependent and light exposure time-dependent decrease in cell viability. As shown in Figure 10, the viability of cells in contact with compound (FX36) or (FX41 ) decreases dramatically upon exposure to light over the range of 5 minutes to 20 minutes. Cells are incubated with compound (FX37) or (FX41 ) at concentrations of 10 μΜ and 20 μΜ. As shown in Figure 10, cells have at least 100% viability at concentrations of 10 μΜ and 20 μΜ with no exposure to light. In the presence of 10 μΜ compound (FX37), cells have at least 100% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, about 92% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 65% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 10 μΜ compound (FX41 ), cells have at least 100% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, about 50% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 35% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 20 μΜ compound (FX37), cells have at least 100% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, at least 100% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 80% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 20 μΜ compound (FX41 ), cells have about 55% viability for light exposure for 5 minutes, about 30% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 20% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes.

[0209] Figure 1 1 provides comparative cell viability results for test conditions wherein human colorectal adenocarcinoma cancer cell lines HCT1 16 (CCL-247) and HT29 (HTB-38), and a nasal pharyngeal carcinoma cell line KB (CCL-17) are exposed to light and the azide photosensitizer having formula (FX37) for photosensitizer concentrations of 6.25 μΜ, 25 μΜ and 100 μΜ. The cell viability experiments with compound (FX37) exhibit concentration-dependent and light exposure time-dependent decrease in cell viability for all cell types. As shown in Figure 1 1 , the viability of cells in contact with compound (FX37) decreases upon exposure to light over the range of 10 minutes to 20 minutes. Cells are incubated with compound (FX37) at concentrations of 6.25 μΜ, 25 μΜ and 100 μΜ.

[0210] As shown in Figure 1 1 (A), in the presence of 6.25 μΜ compound (FX37), HCT1 16 cells have at least 100% viability for light exposure for 0 minutes, about 95% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 58% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 25 μΜ compound (FX37), HCT1 16 cells have about 98% viability for light exposure for 0 minutes, about 70% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 28% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 100 μΜ compound (FX37), HCT1 16 cells have about 88% viability for light exposure for 0 minutes, about 77% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 12% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes.

[0211] As shown in Figure 1 1 (B), in the presence of 6.25 μΜ compound (FX37), KB cells have at least 100% viability for light exposure for 0 minutes, at least 100% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 90% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 25 μΜ compound (FX37), KB cells have at least 100% viability for light exposure for 0 minutes, at least 100% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 84% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 100 μΜ compound (FX37), KB cells have about 95% viability for light exposure for 0 minutes, about 80% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 72% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes.

[0212] As shown in Figure 1 1 (C), in the presence of 6.25 μΜ compound (FX37), HT29 cells have at least 100% viability for light exposure for 0 minutes, at least 100% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 99% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 25 μΜ compound (FX37), HT29 cells have at least 100% viability for light exposure for 0 minutes, about 99% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and at least 100% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes. In the presence of 100 μΜ compound (FX37), HT29 cells have about 90% viability for light exposure for 0 minutes, about 78% viability for light exposure for 10 minutes, and about 62% viability for light exposure for 20 minutes.

1.c.(iv) Apoptosis assay

[0213] The ability of type 1 photosensitizer compounds to induce apoptosis in HCT1 16 cells was assessed using a Vybrant apoptosis kit (Invitrogen, CA) and FACS. Apoptosis was monitored at two time points (4 hours and 24 hours) following phototherapy. The apoptosis assays were performed according to the manufacturer's protocol using a FACS Calibur flow cytometer (Becton Dickinson, USA) and FACS DIVA software (Becton Dickinson, USA). The studies were performed within 1 h of staining and consisted of at least 10,000 events.

[0214] As shown in Figure 12, exposure of HCT1 16 cells to the photosensitizer of formula

(FX36) using the FACS protocol and light causes apoptosis. In Figure 12, the Q3 quadrant (lower left) represents the viable cells, Q1 (upper left) represents the necrotic cells, Q4 (lower right) represents apoptotic only cells and Q2 (upper right) represents late stage apoptotic and/or necrotic cells. In Figure 12(A) HCT1 16 cells were exposed to light for 10 min and 25 μΜ concentration of compound (FX36). In Figure 12(B) HCT1 16 cells were exposed to light for 10 min and 6 μΜ concentration of compound (FX36). In Figure 12(C) HCT1 16 cells were exposed to light for 20 min and 25 μΜ concentration of compound (FX36). In Figure 12(D) HCT1 16 cells were exposed to light for 20 min and 6 μΜ concentration of compound (FX36).

[0215] As shown in Figure 12, compound (FX36) induced cell death in both an apoptotic and necrotic manner. Apoptosis was the predominant mode of cell death as compared to necrosis. At 4 hours of compound exposure there was no significant effect on apoptosis induction. By 24 hours of compound exposure a significant cell population displayed late stage apoptosis. In the present experiment at 24 h after exposure with 25 μΜ and 6.25 μΜ concentration of compound (FX36), and UV light irradiation the apoptotic cell population was a function of light and dose. At higher doses the amount of early apoptotic cells decreased while an increase of late apoptotic cells (Annexin-V+/PI+) was observed. The fraction of pure necrotic cells (Annexin-V_/PI+) is overall very low and increases only slightly at higher irradiation doses. At high concentration of 25 μΜ the compound markedly induces apoptosis in HCT1 16 cells.

Example 1 .d: Targeted Azide Photosensitizer Bioconiuqates

1.d.(i). Targeting Methods

[0216] The invention includes methods for phototherapy using an optical agent providing targeted delivery to a selected target tissue. Embodiments of this aspect use an optical agent, such as a photosensitizer, having a targeting ligand. As will be understood by one of skill in the art, selection of the composition of a targeting ligand in the present methods will dependent on therapeutic and/or diagnostic objectives, the condition of the subject and the chemical composition and properties of the target tissue of interest.

[0217] In one example, a targeted compound can contain all or part of a steroid hormone or a steroid receptor binding compound, and therefore target steroid hormone sensitive receptors. In this example, the targeted compound is administered, targets and preferably accumulates in the desired site such as breast and/or prostate lesion and is photoactivated for monitoring, imaging, or therapy remotely or at the target site. Similar target binding molecules and uses will be recognized by one skilled in the art. For example, the targeted compound can be a compound that targets and binds to a somatostatin, bombesin, CCK, and/or neurotensin receptor binding molecule, or can be a carcinogenic embryonic antigen-binding compound that binds to a carcinogenic embryonic antigen. These are then photoactivated at, for example, lung cancer cells with CCK receptor binding molecules, colorectal cancer cells with ST receptor and carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA) binding molecules, melanoma cells with dihydroxyindolecarboxylic acid, vascular sites of atherosclerotic plaque with integrin receptor binding molecules, brain lesions with amyloid plaque binding molecules, and the like. [0218] Successful specific targeting of photoactive compounds to tumors using antibodies and peptides for diagnostic imaging of tumors has been described in Achilefu et al., Novel receptor- targeted fluorescent contrast agents for in vivo imaging of tumors, Investigative Radiology, 2000, 35, pp. 479-485; Ballou et al., Tumor labeling in vivo using cyanine conjugated monoclonal antibodies, Cancer Immunology and Immunotherapy, 1995, 41 , pp. 257-263; and Licha et al., New contrast agent for optical imaging: acid cleavable conjugates of cyanine dyes with biomolecules, in Biomedical Imaging: Reporters, Dyes and Instrumentation, Proceedings of SPIE, 1999, 3600, pp. 29-35. As such, it is widely accepted that targeted photochemicals are effective in targeting, detecting and treating a wide range of physiological and biological sites.

[0219] The optical agents of this example can contain additional functionalities that can be used to attach various types of biomolecules, synthetic polymers, and organized aggregates for selective delivery to various organs or tissues of interest. Examples of synthetic polymers include polyaminoacids, polyols, polyamines, polyacids, oligonucleotides, aborols, dendrimers, and aptamers. The invention includes, but is not limited to, phototherapeutic agents comprising an optical agent-biomolecule conjugate which provides advantages over nonspecific optical agents or the conjugation of optical agents to very large biomolecules. These conjugates provide enhanced localization in, and rapid visualization of, tumors which is beneficial for imaging, monitoring, diagnosis and therapy. The agents are rapidly cleared from blood and non-target tissues so there is less concern for accumulation and for toxicity. A variety of high purity compounds can be easily synthesized for combinatorial screening of new targets, e.g., to identify receptors or targeting agents, and for the ability to affect the pharmacokinetics of the conjugates by minor structural changes.

[0220] In some embodiments, a liposome or micelle can be utilized as a carrier or vehicle for the composition. For example, in some embodiments, an optical agent comprises a compound of the invention that can be a part of the lipophilic bilayers or micelle, and the targeting ligand, if present, can be on the external surface of the liposome or micelle. As another example, a targeting ligand can be externally attached to the liposome or micelle after formulation for targeting the liposome or micelle (which contains a phototherapeutic agent/photosensitizer compound of the invention) to the desired tissue, organ, or other site in the body.

[0221] In embodiments, compounds of the invention are useful for both oncology and non- oncology applications. Some specific targets are tumors accessible via endoscope. In an application, a compound that targets a protein, polypeptide, oligonucleotide or other biomolecule associated with such a tumor is administered to the tumor via endoscope or other useful method. Then, the compounds of the invention can be used in phototherapeutic applications, monitoring applications, diagnosis applications or imaging applications. Other specific target tissues include colon, lung, ovarian, cervical, esophageal, bladder, blood, stomach cancers, endometriosis, and bacterial infections. 1.d.(ii): Targeting Liqands

[0222] The estrogen receptor is an example of a steroid receptor to which steroid receptor binding molecules would bind. The following compounds are known to bind to the estrogen receptor: estratriol; 17p-aminoestrogen (AE) derivatives such as prolame and butolame; drugs such as tamoxifen, ICI-164384, raloxifene, and genistein; 17p-estradiol; glucocorticoids;

progesterone; estrogens; retinoids; fatty acid derivatives; and phytoestrogens. In addition, commercially available kits can identify compounds specific for binding to the estrogen receptor (e.g., Estrogen Receptor-alpha Competitor Assay Kit, Red; and Estrogen Receptor-beta

Competitor Assay Kit, Red (Invitrogen Corp., Carlsbad CA).

[0223] The glucose receptor is an example of a carbohydrate receptor to which carbohydrate receptor binding molecules would bind. The glucose conjugate N-palmitoyl glucosamine [NPG] is known to bind the glucose receptor (Dufes et al., Pharm. Res. 17:1250, 2000). The glycoprotein hormone receptor is another example of a carbohydrate receptor to which carbohydrate receptor binding molecules would bind. Follicle stimulating hormone (FSH) is known to bind the

glycoprotein hormone receptor (Tilly et al., Endocrinology 131 : 799, 1992). Other compounds known to bind the carbohydrate receptor, and hence examples of carbohydrate receptor binding molecules, are: polysialic acid, bacterial adhesins (specialized surface proteins that mediate binding of many pathogenic bacteria, such as enterohemorrhagic E. coli (EH EC) and Shigella dysenteriae, to host cells, which allow these bacteria to colonize host cell surfaces), soluble carbohydrate receptor analogs, artificial glycopolymers and other multivalent glycoconjugates such as an acrylamide copolymer carrying -L-fucopyranoside and 3-sulfo-D-galactopyranoside in clusters, isomeric carbohydrates, synthetic derivatives, neoglycoproteins, neoglycolipids, glycosidases, and glycosyltransferases. Carbohydrate binding proteins can be screened with phage display libraries as known to a person of ordinary skill in the art.

[0224] Somatostatin receptor binding molecules include somatostatin and somatostatin receptor analogs, octreotide, glycosylated somatostatin-14 (somatostatin-dextran ⁷⁰ ), seglitide, and peptides P587 and P829 as described in Vallabhajosula et al., J. Nuclear Med., 37:1016, 1996.

[0225] Cholecystokinin receptor binding molecules include the endogenous peptides cholecystekinin (CCK)-4, CCK-8, CCK-33, and gastrin; antagonists devazepide and lorglumide; agonists BC264 [Tyr(S0 ₃ H)-gNle-mGly-Trp-(NMe)Nle-Asp-Phe-NH ₃ ] and desulfated CCK-8;

Kinevac (synthetic cholecystekinin, sincalide); and CCK analogues modified at the sulfated tyrosyl at position 27.

[0226] Neurotensin receptor binding molecules include neurotensin, neuromedin N, JMV449 (H- Lysψ(CH ₂ NH)-Lys-Pro-Tyr-lle-Leu), the non-peptide antagonist SR142948A (2-([5-(2,6- dimethoxyphenyl)-1 -(4-(A/-[3-dimethylaminopropyl]-A/-methylcarbamoyl)-2-isopro pylphenyl)-1 /-/- pyrazole-3-carbonyl)amino)adamantine-2-carboxylic acid hydrochloride), and levocobastine.

Commercially available neurotensin receptor binding kits can evaluate potential neurotensin receptor binding molecules (e.g., DELFIA Neurotensin Receptor Binding Kit, PerkinElmer (Boston MA)).

[0227] Bombesin receptor binding molecules include the endogenous ligands gastrin-releasing peptide (GRP), neuromedin B (NMB), and GRP-18-27, and antagonists including JMV-1458 (glycine-extended bombesin (paraphydroxy-phenyl-propionyl-Gln-Trp-Ala-Val-Gly-His-Leu-M et- Gly-OH)), JMV-641 , JMV-1799, and JMV-1802, PD165929, 1 -naphthoyl-[DAIa ²⁴ ,DPro ²⁶ ,i|/26- 27]GRP-20-27, kuwanon H, and kuwanon G. Commercially available bombesin receptor binding kits can evaluate potential bombesin receptor binding molecules (e.g., DELFIA Bombesin Receptor Binding Kit, PerkinElmer (Boston MA)).

[0228] ST receptor binding molecules include native ST peptide, and SEQ ID NO:2, SEQ ID NO:3, SEQ ID NOS:5-54 and fragments and derivatives thereof from U.S. Patent No. 5,518,888.

[0229] Compounds of the invention can contain all or part of a targeting ligand, receptor or peptide known to bind to a specific target, such as a target tissue.

[0230] Targeting ligands may be linked to the backbone or other portion of the present compounds using a range of synthetic approaches known in the art, including the synthetic approaches for conjugating biomolecule targeting ligands to optical agents as disclosed in Hnatowich et al., Radiolabeling of Antibodies: A simple and efficient method, Science, 1983, 220, p. 613; Pelegrin et al., Photoimmunodiagnostics with antibody-fluorescein conjugates: in vitro and in vivo preclinical studies. Journal of Cellular Pharmacology, 1992, 3, pp. 141-145; Achilefu et al., Novel receptor-targeted fluorescent contrast agents for in vivo imaging of tumors, Investigative Radiology, 2000, 35, pp. 479-485; Ballou et al., Tumor labeling in vivo using cyanine conjugated monoclonol antibodies, Cancer Immunology and Immunotherapy, 1995, 41 , pp. 257-263; and Licha et al., New contrast agent for optical imaging: acid cleavable conjugates of cyanine dyes with biomolecules, in Biomedical Imaging: Reporters, Dyes and Instrumentation, Proceedings of SPIE. 1999, 3600, pp. 29-35; and U.S. Patent No. 5,714,342.

[0231] Linking of biomolecule targeting ligands having an amine group, for example, may be achieved by techniques involving succinimido active esters. For example, a carboxyl group of a compound of the invention is activated by making a mixed anhydride in situ with

isobutylchloroformate. The activated compound is subsequently reacted with any biomolecule bearing an amino group, such as a polypeptide, protein, enzyme, antibody or fragment thereof, to achieve linking of the biomolecule to the compound so as to provide a targeting ligand covalently bond to the compound. Alternatively, a carboxyl group of the present compounds may be first esterified with N-hydroxysuccinimide, and subsequently reacted with the amino group of a biomolecule, such as a polypeptide, protein, enzyme, antibody or fragment thereof, to form an amide bond linking the biomolecule to the compound so as to provide a targeting ligand covalently bond to the compound.

EXAMPLE 2: PHOTOTHERAPY METHODS [0232] Phototherapy, such as photodynamic therapy (PDT), typically employs a combination of a photosensitizer (PS) and visible or near infrared light to generate reactive species that kill or otherwise degrade target cells, such as tumors or other lesions. The present invention provides phototherapeutic agents useful for phototherapy.

[0233] The invention includes phototherapy methods wherein a phototherapeutic agent comprising a compound of any one of the formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60) is administered to a patient, for example, wherein a therapeutically effective amount of such a component is administered to a patient in need of treatment. In some embodiments, compounds of the invention provide an optical agent capable of selective targeting and delivery to a target tissue such as a tumor, site of inflammation or other lesion. Upon administration, the phototherapeutic agent is optionally allowed to accumulate in a target region of interest (e.g., target tissue, tumor, or organ). To induce selective tissue damage, the phototherapeutic agent is activated by exposure to electromagnetic radiation. In an embodiment, the phototherapeutic agent is activated after an effective

concentration of the phototherapeutic agent has accumulated in a target tissue. An effective concentration of a compound of the invention depends on the nature of the formulation, method of delivery, target tissue, activation method and toxicity to the surrounding normal non-target tissue. Exposure to electromagnetic radiation and activation of the phototherapeutic agent may occur during or after administration of the phototherapeutic agent and accumulation at the target tissue.

[0234] For photoactivation, the target region is illuminated with electromagnetic radiation having a wavelength in the range of about 350 nm to about 1300 nm, preferably for some applications in the range of about 400 nm to about 900 nm. In some embodiments, the wavelength of the electromagnetic radiation corresponds to a peak in the absorption spectrum of the

phototherapeutic agent, for example is within 20 nanometers of a peak in the absorption spectrum of the phototherapeutic agent in the visible or NIR regions. In some phototherapeutic procedures the target site is exposed to electromagnetic radiation having sufficient fluence and/or power sufficient to activate the phototherapeutic agent so as to induce cell death, for example via necrosis or apoptosis processes. In some embodiments, electromagnetic radiation having low energy, power or fluence is provided to activate the phototherapeutic agent without undesirable thermal effects. If the region of interest is, for example, a lesion or tumor on the skin surface, the region can be directly illuminated. Otherwise, endoscopic and/or endoluminal catheters equipped with an electromagnetic radiation source may be employed to provide a photodiagnostic and/or phototherapeutic effect.

[0235] Appropriate power and intensity of the electromagnetic radiation depends on the size, depth, and the pathology of the lesion, as is known to one skilled in the art. In an embodiment, the fluence of the electromagentic radiation is preferably, but not always, kept below 200 mW/cm ² , optionally below 100 mW/cm ² , to minimize undesirable thermal effects. The intensity, power, and duration of the illumination and the wavelength of the electromagnetic radiation may vary widely depending on the body location, the lesion site, the effect to be achieved, etc. In an embodiment, the power of the applied electromagnetic radiation is preferably is selected over the range of 1 - 500 mW/cm ² and optionally for some applications selected over the range of 1 - 200 mW/cm ² and optionally for some applications selected over the range of 1 - 100 mW/cm ² . In an embodiment, the duration of the exposure to applied electromagentic radiation selected over the range of 1 second to 60 minutes, and optionally for some applications selected over the range of 1 second to 30 minutes, and optionally for some applications selected over the range of 1 second to 10 minutes, and optionally for some applications selected over the range of 1 second to 1 minute.

[0236] In an embodiment, the invention provides a method of using a phototherapeutic agent, the method comprising: (i) administering a therapeutically effective amount of a phototherapeutic agent to a subject, the phototherapeutic agent comprising a compound being of the formula (FX1 ):

(FX1 ); wherein: each R ¹ is -N0 ₂ , -CN, -C0 ₂ R ⁴ , -CONR ⁵ R ⁶ , -S0 ₂ R ⁷ or -(L) _e -

W-Y ¹ ; each of R ² and R ³ is independently -F, -NR ⁸ R ⁹ , -OR ¹⁰ , -SR ¹¹ or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁸ and R ⁹ is independently hydrogen, C C ₂ o alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂ o cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C1-C20 acyl, C2-C20 alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂ o alkynyl, C5-C20 alkylaryl, C ₃ -C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C-|-C ₂ alkylenehydroxy, C ₄ -C ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e - W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁴ - R ⁷ and R ¹⁰ - R ¹¹ is independently hydrogen, C C ₂ o alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, Ci-C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, Ci-C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, CrC ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e - W-Y ¹ ; each Y ¹ is independently hydrogen, FL or Bm; each L is independently C1-C1 ₀ alkylene, C ₃ - C-io cycloalkylene, C ₅ -C ₃₀ arylene, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroarylene, C ₂ -C ₁₀ alkenylene, C ₃ -C ₁₀

cycloalkenylene, C ₂ -Cio alkynylene, ethenylene, ethynylene, phenylene, 1 -aza-2,5- dioxocyclopentylene, -(CH ₂ CH ₂ 0) _a -, -(CHOH) _b -, -(CH ₂ ) _n (CH ₂ CH ₂ 0) _a -, -(CH ₂ ) _n (CHOH) _b -, or 1 ,4- diazacyclohexylene; each W is independently a single bond, -(CH ₂ ) _n - -(HCCH) _m - -0-, -S-, - SO- -SO2-, -SO ₃ -, -OSO2-, -NR ²⁰ -, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -OCOO-, -CONR ²¹ -, -NR ²² CO- , -OCONR ²³ -, -NR ²⁴ COO-, -NR ²⁵ CONR ²⁶ -, -NR ²⁷ CSNR ²⁸ -, -0(CH ₂ ) _n - -S(CH ₂ ) _n -, - NR ²⁹ (CH ₂ ) _n -, -CO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -COO(CH ₂ ) _n - -OCO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -OCOO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -CONR ³⁰ (CH ₂ ) _n -, - NR ³¹ CO(CH ₂ )n- -OCONR ³² (CH ₂ ) _n -, -NR ³³ COO(CH ₂ ) _n -, - NR ³⁶ CSNR ³⁷ (CH ₂ ) _n -, or -0(CH ₂ ) _n NR ³⁸ CO(CH ₂ ) _n -; each of R ²⁰ - R ³⁸ is independently hydrogen, Ci-C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ heteroaryl, or C ₅ -C ₂₀ aryl; each FL is independently a dye group corresponding to a pyrazine, a thiazole, a phenylxanthene, a phenothiazine, a

phenoselenazine, a cyanine, an indocyanine, a squaraine, a dipyrrolo pyrimidone, an

anthraquinone, a tetracene, a quinoline, an acridine, an acridone, a phenanthridine, an azo dye, a rhodamine, a phenoxazine, an azulene, an aza-azulene, a triphenyl methane dye, an indole, a benzoindole, an indocarbocyanine, a Nile Red dye, or a benzoindocarbocyanine; each Bm is independently an amino acid, a peptide, a protein, a nucleoside, a nucleotide, an enzyme, a carbohydrate, a glycomimetic, an oligomer, a lipid, a polymer, an antibody, an antibody fragment, a mono- or polysaccharide comprising 1 to 50 carbohydrate units, a glycopeptide, a glycoprotein, a peptidomimetic, a drug, a steroid, a hormone, an aptamer, a receptor, a metal chelating agent, polynucleotide comprising 2 to 50 nucleic acid units, or a polypeptide comprising 2 to 6 or 8 to 30 amino acid units; each of a and b is independently an integer selected from the range of 1 to 100; each e is independently 0 or 1 ; and each of m and n is independently an integer selected from the range of 1 to 10; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof.

[0237] In an embodiment, the invention provides a compound for use in a phototherapy procedure, the compound being of the formula (FX1 ):

(FX1 ); wherein: each R ¹ is -N0 ₂ , -CN, -C0 ₂ R ⁴ , -CONR ⁵ R ⁶ , -S0 ₂ R ⁷ or -(L) _e -

W-Y ¹ ; each of R ² and R ³ is independently -F, -NR ⁸ R ⁹ , -OR ¹⁰ , -SR ¹¹ or -(L) _e -W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁸ and R ⁹ is independently hydrogen, C C ₂ o alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂ o cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C1-C20 acyl, C2-C20 alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂ o alkynyl, C5-C20 alkylaryl, C ₃ -C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C-|-C ₂ alkylenehydroxy, C ₄ -C ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e - W-Y ¹ ; each of R ⁴ - R ⁷ and R ¹⁰ - R ¹¹ is independently hydrogen, C C ₂ o alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ aryl, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroaryl, C C ₂₀ acyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkenyl, C ₂ -C ₂₀ alkynyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ alkylaryl, C C ₆ alkylenecarboxy, halo, halomethyl, dihalomethyl, trihalomethyl, C1-C1 ₀ alkylenehydroxy or -(L) _e - W-Y ¹ ; each Y ¹ is independently hydrogen, FL or Bm; each L is independently CrC ₀ alkylene, C ₃ - C-io cycloalkylene, C ₅ -C ₃₀ arylene, C ₅ -C ₃₀ heteroarylene, C ₂ -C ₁₀ alkenylene, C ₃ -C ₁₀

cycloalkenylene, C ₂ -Cio alkynylene, ethenylene, ethynylene, phenylene, 1 -aza-2,5- dioxocyclopentylene, -(CH ₂ CH ₂ 0) _a -, -(CHOH) _b -, -(CH ₂ ) _n (CH ₂ CH ₂ 0) _a -, -(CH ₂ ) _n (CHOH) _b -, or 1 ,4- diazacyclohexylene; each W is independently a single bond, -(CH ₂ ) _n - -(HCCH) _m - -0-, -S-, - SO- -SO2-, -SO ₃ -, -OSO2-, -NR ²⁰ -, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -OCOO-, -CONR ²¹ -, -NR ²² CO- , -OCONR ²³ -, -NR ²⁴ COO-, -NR ²⁵ CONR ²⁶ -, -NR ²⁷ CSNR ²⁸ -, -0(CH ₂ ) _n - -S(CH ₂ ) _n -, - NR ²⁹ (CH ₂ ) _n -, -CO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -COO(CH ₂ ) _n - -OCO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -OCOO(CH ₂ ) _n -, -CONR ³⁰ (CH ₂ ) _n -, - NR ³¹ CO(CH ₂ )n- -OCONR ³² (CH ₂ ) _n -, -NR ³³ COO(CH ₂ ) _n -, - NR ³⁶ CSNR ³⁷ (CH ₂ ) _n -, or -0(CH ₂ ) _n NR ³⁸ CO(CH ₂ ) _n -; each of R ²⁰ - R ³⁸ is independently hydrogen, Ci-C ₂₀ alkyl, C ₃ -C ₂₀ cycloalkyl, C ₅ -C ₂₀ heteroaryl, or C ₅ -C ₂₀ aryl; each FL is independently a dye group corresponding to a pyrazine, a thiazole, a phenylxanthene, a phenothiazine, a

phenoselenazine, a cyanine, an indocyanine, a squaraine, a dipyrrolo pyrimidone, an

anthraquinone, a tetracene, a quinoline, an acridine, an acridone, a phenanthridine, an azo dye, a rhodamine, a phenoxazine, an azulene, an aza-azulene, a triphenyl methane dye, an indole, a benzoindole, an indocarbocyanine, a Nile Red dye, or a benzoindocarbocyanine; each Bm is independently an amino acid, a peptide, a protein, a nucleoside, a nucleotide, an enzyme, a carbohydrate, a glycomimetic, an oligomer, a lipid, a polymer, an antibody, an antibody fragment, a mono- or polysaccharide comprising 1 to 50 carbohydrate units, a glycopeptide, a glycoprotein, a peptidomimetic, a drug, a steroid, a hormone, an aptamer, a receptor, a metal chelating agent, polynucleotide comprising 2 to 50 nucleic acid units, or a polypeptide comprising 2 to 6 or 8 to 30 amino acid units; each of a and b is independently an integer selected from the range of 1 to 100; each e is independently 0 or 1 ; and each of m and n is independently an integer selected from the range of 1 to 10; and (ii) exposing the phototherapeutic agent administered to the patient to electromagnetic radiation.

[0238] In an embodiment, the phototherapeutic agent is exposed to a therapeutically effective amount of electromagnetic radiation. As used herein, a therapeutically effective amount of electromagentic radiation is an amount for achieving a desired therapeutic result, for example an amount for generating a therapeutically effective amount of reactive species for damaging or causing cell death of a selected target tissue. In an embodiment, the method further comprises generating one or more reactive species from said compound administered to the patient via the exposure of the phototherapeutic agent to applied electromagnetic radiation. In an embodiment, for example, the method further comprises the step of cleaving a N=N bond and/or C-N bond so as to generate reactive species, such as free radicals, nitrenes, carbenes etc.. In an embodiment, the method further comprises contacting a selected organ or selected tissue in the patient with the phototherapeutic agent. In an embodiment, a therapeutically effective dose of the

phototherapeutic agent is administered to a patient in need of treatment.

[0239] In an embodiment, the method of the invention comprises administering to a patient a compound having any one of formula selected from (FX1 ) - (FX60), including any of the specific compositions classes and compounds described in connection with formula (FX1 ) - (FX60). As will be understood by one of skill in the art, the present methods expressly include methods of using phototherapeutic agents wherein the phototherapeutic agent includes the compound classes, compounds, and all variations thereof, described herein, including the compound classes, compounds and variations described in connection with any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60).

[0240] Embodiments of this aspect may comprise a method of carrying out an in vivo therapeutic and/or diagnostic procedure. In an embodiment, the invention comprises a method of carrying out an in vivo phototherapeutic, photoactivation, and/or photosensitizing procedure. The present methods have broad clinical utility which includes, but is not limited to, phototherapy of tumors, inflammatory processes, and impaired vasculature. In embodiments, subjects of the invention may be any mammal, such as a human, and optionally the subject of the present methods is a patient in need of treatment and/or diagnosis. The present methods are also useful in ex vivo and in vitro procedures, including medical therapeutic and diagnostic procedures. [0241] Methods of the invention may optionally further comprise a number of other steps. In an embodiment, the method further comprises the step of administering the phototherapeutic agent into a bodily fluid of the subject. The phototherapeutic agent may be introduced into the patient by any suitable method, including intravenous, intraperitoneal or subcutaneous injection or infusion, oral administration, transdermal absorption through the skin, or by inhalation. In an embodiment, the method further comprises contacting a target tissue, such as an organ, tissue, tumor, lesion, or cell type, with a compound of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60) prior to or during the exposure step. In an embodiment, the method further comprises allowing the compound to accumulate in a target tissue prior to exposure of the phototherapeutic agent to electromagnetic radiation. In an embodiment, the method further comprises contacting and/or selectively targeting the diagnostic agent to a selected organ, tissue, tumor, lesion, inflammation, or cell type. In an embodiment, the phototherapeutic agent is administered to the skin, a tumor, surgical site, or a wound site. In an embodiment, for example, the phototherapeutic agent is administered and/or delivered to a blood vessel, lung, heart, throat, ear, rectum, bladder, stomach, intestines, esophagus, liver, brain, prostrate, breast, or pancreas of the subject.

[0242] As will be understood by one having skill in the art, the optical conditions for the step of exposing the phototherapeutic agent administered to the patient to electromagnetic radiation will vary considerably with the (i) therapeutic and/or diagnostic objectives, and (ii) the condition of the subject (e.g., height, weight, state of health etc.). In an embodiment, the applied electromagnetic radiation has wavelengths, energy and/or fluence sufficient to achieve a desired therapeutic and/or diagnostic result. In an embodiment, the electromagnetic radiation has wavelengths, energy and/or fluence sufficient to activate the phototherapeutic agent, for example wavelengths, energy and/or fluence sufficient to result in generation of reactive species, including free radicals, nitrenes, carbenes and/or singlet oxygen. In an embodiment, the electromagnetic radiation has

wavelengths, energy and/or fluence sufficient to result in cleavage of at least one photolabile bond of the optical agent upon absorption. In an embodiment, the electromagnetic radiation exposed to the phototherapeutic agent has wavelengths corresponding to a maximum in the absorption spectrum of the phototherapeutic agent, preferably for some applications a maximum (e.g., within 20 nm of a maximum in the absorption spectrum) in the visible or NIR regions of the

electromagnetic spectrum. Optionally, excitation is achieved using electromagnetic radiation substantially free (e.g., less than about 10% of total radiant energy), of ultraviolet radiation, for example, to minimize exposure of the subject to electromagnetic radiation capable of causing unwanted cell or tissue damage. Electromagnetic radiation may be provided to the

phototherapeutic agent using a range of optical sources and/or surgical instrumentation, including a laser, light emitting diodes, fiber optic device, endoscope, catheter, optical filters, or any combination of these.

EXAMPLE 3: PHARMACEUTICAL FORMULATIONS

3. a: Salts and Prodrugs [0243] The invention contemplates pharmaceutically active compounds either chemically synthesized or formed by in vivo biotransformation to compounds set forth herein.

[0244] Compounds of this invention and compounds useful in the methods of this invention include those of the compounds and formula(s) described herein and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts and esters of those compounds. In embodiments, salts include any salts derived from the acids and bases of the formulas herein which are acceptable for use in human or veterinary applications. In embodiments, the term ester refers to hydrolyzable esters of compounds of the names and formulas herein. In embodiments, salts and esters of the compounds of the formulas herein can include those which have the same or better therapeutic, diagnostic, or pharmaceutical (human or veterinary) general properties as the compounds of the formulas herein. In an embodiment, a composition of the invention is a compound or salt or ester thereof suitable for pharmaceutical formulations.

[0245] Compounds of the invention can have prodrug forms. Prodrugs of the compounds of the invention are useful in embodiments including compositions and methods. Any compound that will be converted in vivo to provide a biologically, pharmaceutically, diagnostically, or therapeutically active form of a compound of the invention is a prodrug. Various examples and forms of prodrugs are well known in the art. Examples of prodrugs are found, inter alia, in: Design of Prodrugs, edited by H. Bundgaard, (Elsevier, 1985); Methods in Enzymology, Vol. 42, at pp. 309-396, edited by K. Widder, et. al. (Academic Press, 1985); A Textbook of Drug Design and Development, edited by Krosgaard-Larsen and H. Bundgaard, Chapter 5, "Design and Application of Prodrugs," by H. Bundgaard, at pp. 1 13-191 (1991 ); H. Bundgaard, Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, Vol. 8, p. 1 - 38 (1992); H. Bundgaard, et al., Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences, Vol. 77, p. 285 (1988); and Nogrady (1985) Medicinal Chemistry A Biochemical Approach, Oxford University Press, New York, pages 388-392). A prodrug, such as a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug, can represent prodrugs of the compounds of the invention which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use. Prodrugs of the invention can be rapidly transformed in vivo to a parent compound of a compound described herein, for example, by hydrolysis in blood or by other cell, tissue, organ, or system processes. Further discussion is provided in: T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, V. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series; and in Edward B. Roche, ed., Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, American Pharmaceutical

Association and Pergamon Press (1987).

[0246] Optical agents of the invention can be formulated with pharmaceutically-acceptable anions and/or cations. Pharmaceutically-acceptable cations include among others, alkali metal cations (e.g., Li ⁺ , Na ⁺ , K ⁺ ), alkaline earth metal cations (e.g., Ca ²⁺ , Mg ²⁺ ), non-toxic heavy metal cations and ammonium (NH ₄ ⁺ ) and substituted ammonium (N(R') ₄ ⁺ , where R' is hydrogen, alkyl, or substituted alkyl, i.e., including, methyl, ethyl, or hydroxyethyl, specifically, trimethyl ammonium, triethyl ammonium, and triethanol ammonium cations). Pharmaceutically-acceptable anions include, among others, halides (e.g., F ^" , Cl ^~ , Br ^" , At ^" ), sulfate, acetates (e.g., acetate,

trifluoroacetate), ascorbates, aspartates, benzoates, citrates, and lactate.

[0247] Pharmaceutically acceptable salts comprise pharmaceutically-acceptable anions and/or cations. As used herein, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" can refer to acid addition salts or base addition salts of the compounds in the present disclosure. A pharmaceutically acceptable salt is any salt which retains at least a portion of the activity of the parent compound and does not impart significant deleterious or undesirable effect on a subject to whom it is administered and in the context in which it is administered. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include metal complexes and salts of both inorganic and organic acids. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include metal salts such as aluminum, calcium, iron, magnesium, manganese and complex salts.

Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, acid salts such as acetic, aspartic, alkylsulfonic, arylsulfonic, axetil, benzenesulfonic, benzoic, bicarbonic, bisulfuric, bitartaric, butyric, calcium edetate, camsylic, carbonic, chlorobenzoic, cilexetil, citric, edetic, edisylic, estolic, esyl, esylic, formic, fumaric, gluceptic, gluconic, glutamic, glycolic,

glycolylarsanilic, hexamic, hexylresorcjnoic, hydrabamic, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, hydroiodic, hydroxynaphthoic, isethionic, lactic, lactobionic, maleic, malic, malonic, mandelic,

methanesulfonic, methylnitric, methylsulfuric, mucic, muconic, napsylic, nitric, oxalic, p- nitromethanesulfonic, pamoic, pantothenic, phosphoric, monohydrogen phosphoric, dihydrogen phosphoric, phthalic, polygalactouronic, propionic, salicylic, stearic, succinic, sulfamic, sulfanlic, sulfonic, sulfuric, tannic, tartaric, teoclic, toluenesulfonic, and the like. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts can be derived from amino acids, including, but not limited to, cysteine. Other

pharmaceutically acceptable salts can be found, for example, in Stahl et al., Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection, and Use, Wiley-VCH, Verlag Helvetica Chimica Acta, Zurich, 2002. (ISBN 3-906390-26-8).

3.b: Efficacy

[0248] Typically, a compound of the invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, is administered to a subject in a diagnostically or therapeutically effective amount. One skilled in the art generally can determine an appropriate dosage.

[0249] Compositions for oral administration can be, for example, prepared in a manner such that a single dose in one or more oral preparations contains at least about 20 mg of the present compound per square meter of subject body surface area, or at least about 50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, or 500 mg of the present compound per square meter of subject body surface area (the average body surface area for a human is, for example, 1.8 square meters). In particular, a single dose of a composition for oral administration can contain from about 20 to about 600 mg, and in certain aspects from about 20 to about 400 mg, in another aspect from about 20 to about 300 mg, and in yet another aspect from about 20 to about 200 mg of the present compound per square meter of subject body surface area. Compositions for parenteral administration can be prepared in a manner such that a single dose contains at least about 20 mg of the present compound per square meter of subject body surface area, or at least about 40, 50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, or 500 mg of the present compound per square meter of subject body surface area. In particular, a single dose in one or more parenteral preparations contains from about 20 to about 500 mg, and in certain aspects from about 20 to about 400 mg, and in another aspect from about 20 to about 450 mg, and in yet another aspect from about 20 to about 350 mg of the present compound per square meter of subject body surface area. It should be recognized that these oral and parenteral dosage ranges represent generally preferred dosage ranges, and are not intended to limit the invention. The dosage regimen actually employed can vary widely, and, therefore, can deviate from the generally preferred dosage regimen. It is contemplated that one skilled in the art will tailor these ranges to the individual subject.

[0250] Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds and bioconjugates can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals for determining the LD ₅₀ (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED ₅₀ , (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index that can be expressed as the ratio LD ₅ o/ED ₅ o. Compounds and bioconjugates that exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. While compounds and bioconjugates exhibiting toxic side effects can be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such compounds and bioconjugates to the site affected by the disease or disorder in order to minimize potential damage to unaffected cells and reduce side effects.

[0251] Data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosages for use in humans and other mammals. The dosage of such compounds and bioconjugates lies preferably within a range of circulating plasma or other bodily fluid

concentrations that include the ED ₅₀ and provides clinically efficacious results (i.e., reduction in disease symptoms). The dosage can vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. For any compound and bioconjugate of the present invention, the therapeutically effective amount can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. A dosage can be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma

concentration range that includes the ED ₅₀ (the concentration of the test compound that achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful dosages in humans and other mammals. Compound and bioconjugate levels in plasma can be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.

[0252] An amount of a compound or bioconjugate that can be combined with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the patient treated and the particular mode of administration. It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the unit content of a compound/bioconjugate contained in an individual dose of each dosage form need not in itself constitute a therapeutically effective amount, as the necessary therapeutically effective amount could be reached by administration of a number of individual doses. The selection of dosage depends upon the dosage form utilized, the condition being treated, and the particular purpose to be achieved according to the determination of those skilled in the art.

[0253] The dosage and dosage regime for treating a disease or condition can be selected in accordance with a variety of factors, including the type, age, weight, sex, diet and/or medical condition of the patient, the route of administration, pharmacological considerations such as activity, efficacy, pharmacokinetic and/or toxicology profiles of the particular

compound/bioconjugate employed, whether a compound/bioconjugate delivery system is utilized, and/or whether the compound/bioconjugate is administered as a pro-drug or part of a drug combination. Thus, the dosage regime actually employed can vary widely from subject to subject, or disease to disease and different routes of administration can be employed in different clinical settings.

[0254] The identified compounds/bioconjugates monitor, treat, inhibit, control and/or prevent, or at least partially arrest or partially prevent, diseases and conditions of interest and can be administered to a subject at therapeutically effective amounts and optionally diagnostically effective amounts. Compositions/formulations of the present invention comprise a therapeutically effective amount (which can optionally include a diagnostically effective amount) of at least one compound or bioconjugate of the present invention. Subjects receiving treatment that includes a compound/bioconjugate of the invention are preferably animals (e.g., mammals, reptiles and/or avians), more preferably humans, horses, cows, dogs, cats, sheep, pigs, and/or chickens, and most preferably humans.

3.c: Administration

[0255] The preferred composition depends on the route of administration. Any route of administration can be used as long as the target of the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt is available via that route. Suitable routes of administration include, for example, oral, intravenous, parenteral, inhalation, rectal, nasal, topical (e.g., transdermal and intraocular), intravesical, intrathecal, enteral, pulmonary, intralymphatic, intracavital, vaginal, transurethral, intradermal, aural, intramammary, buccal, orthotopic, intratracheal, intralesional, percutaneous, endoscopical, transmucosal, sublingual, and intestinal administration.

[0256] In an embodiment, the invention provides a method for treating a medical condition comprising administering to a subject (e.g. patient) in need thereof, a therapeutically effective amount of a composition of the invention, such as a compound of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60). In an embodiment, the invention provides a method for diagnosing or aiding in the diagnosis of a medical condition comprising administering to a subject in need thereof, a diagnostically effective amount of a composition of the invention. In an embodiment, the medical condition is cancer, or various other diseases, injuries, and disorders, including cardiovascular disorders such as atherosclerosis and vascular restenosis, inflammatory diseases, ophthalmic diseases and dermatological diseases.

[0257] The diagnostic and therapeutic formulations of this invention can be administered alone, but can be administered with a pharmaceutical carrier selected upon the basis of the chosen route of administration and standard pharmaceutical practice.

[0258] Any suitable form of administration can be employed in connection with the diagnostic and therapeutic formulations of the invention. The diagnostic and therapeutic formulations of this invention can be administered intravenously, in oral dosage forms, intraperitoneally,

subcutaneously, or intramuscularly, all using dosage forms well known to those of ordinary skill in the pharmaceutical arts.

[0259] The present compositions, preparations and formulations can be formulated into diagnostic or therapeutic compositions for enteral, parenteral, topical, aerosol, inhalation, or cutaneous administration. Topical or cutaneous delivery of the compositions, preparations and formulations can also include aerosol formulation, creams, gels, solutions, etc. The present compositions, preparations and formulations are administered in doses effective to achieve the desired diagnostic and/or therapeutic effect. Such doses can vary widely depending upon the particular compositions employed in the composition, the organs or tissues to be examined, the equipment employed in the clinical procedure, the efficacy of the treatment achieved, and the like. These compositions, preparations and formulations contain an effective amount of the

composition(s), along with conventional pharmaceutical carriers and excipients appropriate for the type of administration contemplated. These compositions, preparations and formulations can also optionally include stabilizing agents and skin penetration enhancing agents.

(i) Parenteral Administration

[0260] Compounds and bioconjugates of the present invention can be formulated for parenteral administration by injection (e.g., by bolus injection or continuous infusion). Formulations for injection can be presented in unit dosage form in ampoules or in multi-dose containers with an optional preservative added. The parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass, plastic or the like. The formulation can take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and can contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents.

[0261] For example, a parenteral preparation can be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent (e.g., as a solution in 1 ,3-butanediol). Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that can be employed are water, Ringer's solution, and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or di-glycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid can be used in the parenteral preparation. [0262] Alternatively, compounds and bioconjugates of the present invention can be formulated in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, such as sterile pyrogen-free water, before use. For example, a compound/bioconjugate suitable for parenteral administration can include a sterile isotonic saline solution containing between 0.1 percent and 90 percent weight per volume of the compound/bioconjugate. By way of example, a solution can contain from about 5 percent to about 20 percent, more preferably from about 5 percent to about 17 percent, more preferably from about 8 to about 14 percent, and still more preferably about 10 percent weight per volume of the compound/bioconjugate. The solution or powder preparation can also include a solubilizing agent and a local anesthetic such as lignocaine to ease pain at the site of the injection. Other methods of parenteral delivery of compounds/bioconjugates will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention.

( i i ) Oral A dministration

[0263] For oral administration, a compound/bioconjugate of the invention can be formulated to take the form of tablets or capsules prepared by conventional means with one or more

pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (e.g., excipients such as binding agents, fillers, lubricants and disintegrants).

(iii) Controlled-Release Administration

[0264] Controlled-release (or sustained-release) preparations can be formulated to extend the activity of a compound/bioconjugate and reduce dosage frequency. Controlled-release

preparations can also be used to effect the time of onset of action or other characteristics, such as blood levels of the compound/bioconjugate, and consequently affect the occurrence of side effects.

[0265] Controlled-release preparations can be designed to initially release an amount of a compound/bioconjugate that produces the desired therapeutic effect, and gradually and continually release other amounts of the compound/bioconjugate to maintain the level of therapeutic effect over an extended period of time. In order to maintain a near-constant level of a

compound/bioconjugate in the body, the compound/bioconjugate can be released from the dosage form at a rate that will replace the amount of compound/bioconjugate being metabolized and/or excreted from the body. The controlled-release of a compound/bioconjugate can be stimulated by various inducers, e.g., change in pH, change in temperature, enzymes, water, and/or other physiological conditions or molecules.

[0266] Controlled-release systems can include, for example, an infusion pump which can be used to administer the compound/bioconjugate in a manner similar to that used for delivering insulin or chemotherapy to the body generally, or to specific organs or tumors. Typically, using such a system, the compound/bioconjugate is administered in combination with a biodegradable, biocompatible polymeric implant that releases the compound/bioconjugate over a controlled period of time at a selected site. Examples of polymeric materials include polyanhydrides, polyorthoesters, polyglycolic acid, polylactic acid, polyethylene vinyl acetate, and copolymers and combinations thereof. In addition, a controlled release system can be placed in proximity of a therapeutic target (e.g., organ, tissue, or group of cells), thus requiring only a fraction of a systemic dosage.

[0267] Compounds/bioconjugates of the invention can be administered by other controlled- release means or delivery devices that are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. These include, for example, hydropropylmethyl cellulose, other polymer matrices, gels, permeable membranes, osmotic systems, multilayer coatings, micro particles, liposomes, microspheres, or the like, or a combination of any of the above to provide the desired release profile in varying proportions. Other methods of controlled-release delivery of compounds/bioconjugates will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention.

(iv) Inhalation Administration

[0268] Compounds/bioconjugates of the invention can be administered directly to the lung of a patient/subject by inhalation. For administration by inhalation, a compound/bioconjugate can be conveniently delivered to the lung by a number of different devices. For example, a Metered Dose Inhaler ("MDI") which utilizes canisters that contain a suitable low boiling point propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas can be used to deliver a compound/bioconjugate directly to the lung. MDI devices are available from a number of suppliers such as 3M Corporation, Aventis, Boehringer Ingleheim, Forest Laboratories, GlaxoSmithKline, Merck & Co. and Vectura.

[0269] Alternatively, a Dry Powder Inhaler (DPI) device can be used to administer a

compound/bioconjugate to the lung. DPI devices typically use a mechanism such as a burst of gas to create a cloud of dry powder inside a container, which can then be inhaled by the patient. DPI devices are also well known in the art and can be purchased from a number of vendors which include, for example, GlaxoSmithKline, Nektar Therapeutics, Innovata and Vectura. A popular variation is the multiple dose DPI ("MDDPI") system, which allows for the delivery of more than one therapeutic dose. MDDPI devices are available from companies such as AstraZeneca, GlaxoSmithKline, TEVA, Merck & Co., SkyePharma and Vectura. For example, capsules and cartridges of gelatin for use in an inhaler or insufflator can be formulated containing a powder mix of the compound/bioconjugate and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch for these systems.

[0270] Another type of device that can be used to deliver a compound/bioconjugate to the lung is a liquid spray device supplied, for example, by Aradigm Corporation. Liquid spray systems use extremely small nozzle holes to aerosolize liquid compound/bioconjugate formulations that can then be directly inhaled into the lung. For example, a nebulizer device can be used to deliver a compound/bioconjugate to the lung. Nebulizers create aerosols from liquid

compound/bioconjugate formulations by using, for example, ultrasonic energy to form fine particles that can be readily inhaled. Examples of nebulizers include devices supplied by Aventis and Battelle.

[0271] In another example, an electrohydrodynamic ("EHD") aerosol device can be used to deliver a compound/bioconjugate to the lung. EHD aerosol devices use electrical energy to aerosolize liquid compound/bioconjugate solutions or suspensions. The electrochemical properties of the compound/bioconjugate formulation are important parameters to optimize when delivering this compound/bioconjugate to the lung with an EHD aerosol device. Such optimization is routinely performed by one of skill in the art. Other methods of intra-pulmonary delivery of

compounds/bioconjugates will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention.

[0272] Liquid compound/bioconjugate formulations suitable for use with nebulizers and liquid spray devices and EHD aerosol devices will typically include the compound/bioconjugate with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In one exemplary embodiment, the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is a liquid such as alcohol, water, polyethylene glycol or a perfluorocarbon. Optionally, another material can be added to alter the aerosol properties of the solution or suspension of the compound/bioconjugate. For example, this material can be a liquid such as an alcohol, glycol, polyglycol or a fatty acid. Other methods of formulating liquid

compound/bioconjugate solutions or suspensions suitable for use in aerosol devices are known to those of skill in the art.

(v) Depot Administration

[0273] A compound/bioconjugate of the invention can be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long-acting formulations can be administered by implantation (e.g., subcutaneously or intramuscularly) or by intramuscular injection. Accordingly, the compound/bioconjugate can be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials such as an emulsion in an acceptable oil or ion exchange resin, or as sparingly soluble derivatives such as a sparingly soluble salt. Other methods of depot delivery of compounds/bioconjugates will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention.

(vi) Topical Administration

[0274] For topical application, a compound/bioconjugate can be combined with a

pharmaceutically acceptable carrier so that an effective dosage is delivered, based on the desired activity ranging from an effective dosage, for example, of 1.0 μΜ to 1 .0 mM. In one aspect of the invention, a topical formulation of a compound/bioconjugate can be applied to the skin. The pharmaceutically acceptable carrier can be in the form of, for example, and not by way of limitation, an ointment, cream, gel, paste, foam, aerosol, suppository, pad or gelled stick.

[0275] A topical formulation can include a therapeutically effective amount of a

compound/bioconjugate in an ophthalmologically acceptable excipient such as buffered saline, mineral oil, vegetable oils such as corn or arachis oil, petroleum jelly, Miglyol 182, alcohol solutions, or liposomes or liposome-like products. Any of these formulations of such

compounds/bioconjugates can include preservatives, antioxidants, antibiotics,

immunosuppressants, and other biologically or pharmaceutically effective agents that do not exert a significant detrimental effect on the compound/bioconjugate. Other methods of topical delivery of compounds/bioconjugates will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention.

(vii) Rectal Administration

[0276] Compounds/bioconjugates of the invention can be formulated in rectal formulations such as suppositories or retention enemas that include conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides and/or binders and/or carriers such as triglycerides, microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin. Rectal formulations can contain a compound/bioconjugate in the range of 0.5% to 10% by weight, for example. Other methods of rectal delivery of

compounds/bioconjugates will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention.

(viii) Other Systems of Administration

[0277] Various other delivery systems are known in the art and can be used to administer the compounds/bioconjugates of the invention. Moreover, these and other delivery systems can be combined and/or modified to promote optimization of the administration of

compounds/bioconjugates of the present invention. Exemplary formulations that include compounds/bioconjugates of the present invention are described elsewhere herein (the compounds/bioconjugates of the present invention are indicated as the active ingredient, but those of skill in the art will recognize that pro-drugs and compound combinations are also meant to be encompassed by this term).

3.d: Formulation

[0278] In an embodiment, the invention provides a medicament which comprises a

therapeutically effective amount of one or more compositions of the invention, such as a compound of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60). In an embodiment, the invention provides a medicament which comprises a diagnostically effective amount of one or more compositions of the invention. In an embodiment, the invention provides a method for making a medicament for treatment of a condition described herein, such as the treatment of cancer, inflammation, stenosis or a vascular disease. In an embodiment, the invention provides a method for making a medicament for diagnosis or aiding in the diagnosis of a condition described herein, such as the diagnosis of cancer, inflammation, stenosis or a vascular disease. In an embodiment, the invention provides the use of one or more compositions set forth herein for the making of a medicament for the treatment of cancer, inflammation, stenosis or a vascular disease. In an embodiment, the invention provides the use of one or more compositions set forth herein for the treatment of a disease. In an embodiment, the invention provides the use of one or more compositions set forth herein for the diagnosis of a disease. Compositions of the invention include formulations and preparations comprising one or more of the present optical agents provided in an aqueous solution, such as a pharmaceutically acceptable formulation or preparation. Optionally, compositions of the invention further comprise one or more pharmaceutically acceptable surfactants, buffers, electrolytes, salts, carriers, binders, coatings, preservatives and/or excipients.

[0279] In an embodiment, the invention provides a pharmaceutical formulation having an active ingredient comprising a composition of the invention, such as a compound of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60). In an embodiment, the invention provides a method of synthesizing a composition of the invention or a pharmaceutical formulation thereof, such as a compound of any one of formulas (FX1 ) - (FX60). In an embodiment, a pharmaceutical formulation comprises one or more excipients, carriers, diluents, and/or other components as would be understood in the art.

Preferably, the components meet the standards of the National Formulary ("NF"), United States Pharmacopoeia ("USP"; United States Pharmacopeial Convention Inc., Rockville, Maryland), or Handbook of Pharmaceutical Manufacturing Formulations (Sarfaraz K. Niazi, all volumes, ISBN: 9780849317521 , ISBN 10: 0849317525; CRC Press, 2004). See, e.g., United States

Pharmacopeia and National Formulary (USP 30-NF 25), Rockville, MD: United States

Pharmacopeial Convention (2007 and 2008), and each of any earlier editions; The Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients, published jointly by the American Pharmacists Association and the Pharmaceutical Press (Pharmaceutical Press (2005) (ISBN-10: 0853696187, ISBN-13: 978- 0853696186)); Merck Index, Merck & Co., Rahway, N.J.; and Gilman et al., (eds) (1996);

Goodman and Gilman's: The Pharmacological Bases of Therapeutics, 8th Ed., Pergamon Press. In embodiments, the formulation base of the formulations of the invention comprises

physiologically acceptable excipients, namely, at least one binder and optionally other

physiologically acceptable excipients. Physiologically acceptable excipients are those known to be usable in the pharmaceutical technology sectors and adjacent areas, particularly, those listed in relevant pharmacopeias (e.g. DAB, Ph. Eur., BP, NF, USP), as well as other excipients whose properties do not impair a physiological use.

[0280] This invention also is directed, in part, to pharmaceutical compositions including a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or salt of this invention, as well as processes for making such compositions. Such compositions generally include one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (e.g., excipients, vehicles, auxiliaries, adjuvants, diluents) and can include other active ingredients. Formulation of these compositions can be achieved by various methods known in the art. A general discussion of these methods can be found in, for example, Hoover, John E., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (Mack Publishing Co., Easton, PA: 1975). See also, Lachman, L, eds., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms (Marcel Decker, New York, N. Y., 1980).

[0281] The diagnostic and therapeutic formulations of this invention and medicaments of this invention can further comprise one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, excipients, buffers, emulsifiers, surfactants, electrolytes or diluents. Such compositions and medicaments are prepared in accordance with acceptable pharmaceutical procedures, such as, for example, those described in Remingtons Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th edition, ed. Alfonoso R. Gennaro, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa. (1985).

[0282] Compositions of the invention include formulations and preparations comprising one or more of the present compounds provided in an aqueous solution, such as a pharmaceutically acceptable formulation or preparation. Optionally, compositions of the invention further comprise one or more pharmaceutically acceptable surfactants, buffers, electrolytes, salts, carriers, binders, coatings, preservatives and/or excipients.

[0283] Compounds and bioconjugates of the present invention can be formulated by known methods for administration to a subject using several routes which include, but are not limited to, parenteral, oral, topical, intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, epidural, and ophthalmic routes. An individual compound/bioconjugate can be administered in combination with one or more additional compounds/bioconjugates of the present invention and/or together with other biologically active or biologically inert agents. Such biologically active or inert agents can be in fluid or mechanical communication with the

compound(s)/bioconjugate(s) or attached to the compound(s)/bioconjugate(s) by ionic, covalent, Van der Waals, hydrophobic, hydrophilic or other physical forces. It is preferred that administration is localized in a subject, but administration can also be systemic.

[0284] Compounds and bioconjugates of the present invention can be formulated by any conventional manner using one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. Thus, the compound(s)/bioconjugate(s) and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts and solvates can be specifically formulated for administration, e.g., by inhalation or insufflation (either through the mouth or the nose) or oral, buccal, parenteral or rectal administration. The

compounds/bioconjugates can take the form of charged, neutral and/or other pharmaceutically acceptable salt forms. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include, but are not limited to, those described in REMINGTON'S PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES (A.R. Gennaro, Ed.), 20th edition, Williams & Wilkins PA, USA (2000).

[0285] Compounds and bioconjugates of the present invention can be formulated in the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsions, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, controlled- or sustained- release formulations and the like. Such formulations will contain a therapeutically effective amount of the compound/bioconjugate, preferably in purified form, together with a suitable amount of carrier so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient. The formulation should suit the mode of administration.

[0286] Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers that can be used in conjunction with the compounds of the invention are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Carriers can be selected based on a number of factors including, for example, the particular compound(s) or pharmaceutically acceptable salt(s) used; the compound's concentration, stability, and intended bioavailability; the condition being treated; the subject's age, size, and general condition; the route of administration; etc. A general discussion related to carriers can be found in, for example, J.G. Nairn, Remington's Pharmaceutical Science, pp. 1492-1517 (A. Gennaro, ed., Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa. (1985)).

[0287] Solid dosage forms for oral administration include, for example, capsules, tablets, gelcaps, pills, dragees, troches, powders, granules, and lozenges. In such solid dosage forms, the compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof can be combined with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. The compounds and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof can be mixed with carriers including, but not limited to, lactose, sucrose, starch powder, corn starch, potato starch, magnesium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, cellulose esters of alkanoic acids, cellulose alkyl esters, talc, stearic acid, magnesium stearate, magnesium oxide, sodium and calcium salts of phosphoric and sulfuric acids, sodium carbonate, agar, mannitol, sorbitol, sodium saccharin, gelatin, acacia gum, alginic acid, sodium alginate, tragacanth, colloidal silicon dioxide, croscarmellose sodium, polyvinylpyrrolidone, and/or polyvinyl alcohol, and then tableted or encapsulated for convenient administration. Such capsules or tablets can contain a controlled-release formulation, as can be provided in a dispersion of the compound or salt in hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose. In the case of capsules, tablets, and pills, the dosage forms also can include buffering agents, such as sodium citrate, or magnesium or calcium carbonate or bicarbonate. Tablets and pills additionally can, for example, include a coating (e.g., an enteric coating) to delay disintegration and absorption. The concentration of the present compounds in a solid oral dosage form can be from about 5 to about 50% for example, and in certain aspects from about 8 to about 40%, and in another aspect from about 10 to about 30% by weight based on the total weight of the composition.

[0288] Liquid dosage forms of the compounds of the invention for oral administration include, for example, pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups, and elixirs containing inert diluents commonly used in the art (e.g., water). Such compositions also can include adjuvants, such as wetting, emulsifying, suspending, flavoring (e.g., sweetening), and/or perfuming agents. The concentration of the present compounds in the liquid dosage form can be from about 0.01 to about 5 mg, and in certain aspects from about 0.01 to about 1 mg, and in another aspect from about 0.01 to about 0.5 mg per ml of the composition. Low concentrations of the compounds of the invention in liquid dosage form can be prepared in the case that the compound is more soluble at low concentrations. Techniques for making oral dosage forms useful in the invention are generally described in, for example, Modern Pharmaceutics, Chapters 9 and 10 (Banker & Rhodes, Editors (1979)). See also, Lieberman et al., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms: Tablets (1981 ). See also, Ansel, Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms (2nd Edition (1976)). [0289] In some aspects of the invention, tablets or powders for oral administration can be prepared by dissolving the compound in a pharmaceutically acceptable solvent capable of dissolving the compound to form a solution and then evaporating when the solution is dried under vacuum. A carrier can also be added to the solution before drying. The resulting solution can be dried under vacuum to form a glass. The glass can then be mixed with a binder to form a powder. This powder can be mixed with fillers or other conventional tableting agents, and then processed to form a tablet. Alternatively, the powder can be added to a liquid carrier to form a solution, emulsion, suspension, or the like.

[0290] In some aspects, solutions for oral administration are prepared by dissolving the compound in a pharmaceutically acceptable solvent capable of dissolving the compound to form a solution. An appropriate volume of a carrier is added to the solution while stirring to form a pharmaceutically acceptable solution for oral administration.

[0291] In some embodiments, a liposome or micelle can be utilized as a carrier or vehicle for the composition. For example, in some embodiments, the compound can be a part of the lipophilic bilayers or micelle, and the targeting ligand, if present, can be on the external surface of the liposome or micelle. As another example, a targeting ligand can be externally attached to the liposome or micelle after formulation for targeting the liposome or micelle (which contains the optical agents) to the desired tissue, organ, or other site in the body.

[0292] Injectable preparations (e.g., sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions) can be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting agents, and/or suspending agents. Acceptable vehicles for parenteral use include both aqueous and nonaqueous pharmaceutically-acceptable solvents. Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable aqueous solvents include, for example, water, saline solutions, dextrose solutions (such as DW5), electrolyte solutions, etc.

[0293] In one embodiment, the present compounds are formulated as nanoparticles or microparticles. Use of such nanoparticle or microparticle formulations can be beneficial for some applications to enhance delivery, localization, target specificity, administration, etc. of the compound. Potentially useful nanoparticles and microparticles include, but are not limited to, micelles, liposomes, microemulsions, nanoemulsions, vesicles, tubular micelles, cylindrical micelles, bilayers, folded sheets structures, globular aggregates, swollen micelles, inclusion complex, encapsulated droplets, microcapsules, nanocapsules or the like. As will be understood by those having skill in the art, the present compounds can be located inside the nanoparticle or microparticle, within a membrane or wall of the nanoparticle or microparticle, or outside of (but bonded to or otherwise associated with) the nanoparticle or microparticle. The agent formulated in nanoparticles or microparticles can be administered by any of the routes previously described. In a formulation applied topically, the compound is slowly released over time. In an injectable formulation, the liposome, micelle, capsule, etc., circulates in the bloodstream and is delivered to the desired site (e.g., target tissue).

[0294] Preparation and loading of nanoparticles and microparticles are well known in the art. As one example, liposomes can be prepared from dipalmitoyl phosphatidylcholine (DPPC) or egg phosphatidylcholine (PC) because this lipid has a low heat transition. Liposomes are made using standard procedures as known to one skilled in the art (e.g. , Braun-Falco et al., (Eds.), Griesbach Conference, Liposome Dermatics, Springer-Verlag, Berlin (1992), pp. 69 81 ; 91 1 17.

Polycaprolactone, poly(glycolic) acid, poly(lactic) acid, polyanhydride or lipids can be formulated as microspheres. As an illustrative example, the present compounds can be mixed with polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), the mixture then dried and coated with ethylene vinyl acetate, then cooled again with PVA. In a liposome, the present compounds can be within one or both lipid bilayers, in the aqueous between the bilayers, or within the center or core. Liposomes can be modified with other molecules and lipids to form a cationic liposome. Liposomes can also be modified with lipids to render their surface more hydrophilic which increases their circulation time in the bloodstream. The thus-modified liposome has been termed a "stealth" liposome, or a long-lived liposome, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,258,378, and in Stealth Liposomes, Lasic and Martin (Eds.) 1995 CRC Press, London. Encapsulation methods include detergent dialysis, freeze drying, film forming, injection, as known to one skilled in the art and disclosed in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 6,406,713. Optionally, the present compositions and methods include a micelle delivery system, for example, involving one or more PEG-based amphiphilic polymers developed for drug delivery including: PEG-poly(8-caprolactone), PEG-poly(amino acid), PEG-polylactide or PEG- phospholipid constructs; a cross linked poly(acrylic acid) polymer system, a phospholipid-based system and/or block copolymer systems comprising one or more of the following polymer blocks: a poly(lactic acid) polymer block; a poly(propylene glycol) polymer block; a poly(amino acid) polymer block; a poly(ester) polymer block; a poly (ε-caprolactone) polymer block; a poly(ethylene glycol) block, a poly(acrylic acid) block; a polylactide block; a polyester block; a polyamide block; a polyanhydride block; a polyurethane block; a polyimine block; a polyurea block; a polyacetal block; a polysaccharide block; and a polysiloxane block.

[0295] Suitable pharmaceutically-acceptable nonaqueous solvents include, but are not limited to, the following (as well as mixtures thereof):

[0296] (i) Alcohols (these include, for example, o-glycerol formal, β-glycerol formal, 1 , 3- butyleneglycol, aliphatic or aromatic alcohols having from 2 to about 30 carbons (e.g., methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol, t-butanol, hexanol, octanol, amylene hydrate, benzyl alcohol, glycerin (glycerol), glycol, hexylene, glycol, tetrahydrofuranyl alcohol, cetyl alcohol, and stearyl alcohol), fatty acid esters of fatty alcohols (e.g., polyalkylene glycols, such as

polypropylene glycol and polyethylene glycol), sorbitan, sucrose, and cholesterol); [0297] (ii) Amides, which include, for example, dimethylacetamide (DMA), benzyl benzoate DMA, dimethylformamide, N-hydroxyethyO-lactamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide-amides, 2- pyrrolidinone, 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, and polyvinylpyrrolidone;

[0298] (iii) Esters, which include, for example, acetate esters (e.g., monoacetin, diacetin, and triacetin), aliphatic and aromatic esters (e.g., ethyl caprylate or octanoate, alkyl oleate, benzyl benzoate, or benzyl acetate), dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), esters of glycerin (e.g., mono, di, and tri- glyceryl citrates and tartrates), ethyl benzoate, ethyl acetate, ethyl carbonate, ethyl lactate, ethyl oleate, fatty acid esters of sorbitan, glyceryl monostearate, glyceride esters (e.g., mono, di, or triglycerides), fatty acid esters (e.g., isopropyl myristrate), fatty acid derived PEG esters (e.g., PEG- hydroxyoleate and PEG-hydroxystearate), N-methyl pyrrolidinone, pluronic 60, polyoxyethylene sorbitol oleic polyesters (e.g., poly(ethoxylated) ₃ o-6o sorbitol poly(oleate) ₂ -4, poly(oxyethylene)i ₅ -2o monooleate, poly(oxyethylene) _15-2 o mono 12-hydroxystearate, and poly(oxyethylene) _15-2 o mono ricinoleate), polyoxyethylene sorbitan esters (e.g., polyoxyethylene-sorbitan monooleate, polyoxyethylene-sorbitan monopalmitate, polyoxyethylene-sorbitan monolaurate, polyoxyethylene- sorbitan monostearate, and POLYSORBATE 20, 40, 60, and 80 (from ICI Americas, Wilmington, DE)), polyvinylpyrrolidone, alkyleneoxy modified fatty acid esters (e.g., polyoxyl 40 hydrogenated castor oil and polyoxyethylated castor oils, such as CREMOPHOR EL solution or CREMOPHOR RH 40 solution), saccharide fatty acid esters (i.e., the condensation product of a monosaccharide (e.g., pentoses, such as, ribose, ribulose, arabinose, xylose, lyxose, and xylulose; hexoses, such as glucose, fructose, galactose, mannose, and sorbose; trioses; tetroses; heptoses; and octoses), disaccharide (e.g., sucrose, maltose, lactose, and trehalose), oligosaccharide, or a mixture thereof with one or more C4-C22 fatty acids (e.g., saturated fatty acids, such as caprylic acid, capric acid, lauric acid, myristic acid, palmitic acid, and stearic acid; and unsaturated fatty acids, such as palmitoleic acid, oleic acid, elaidic acid, erucic acid, and linoleic acid), and steroidal esters;

[0299] (iv) Ethers, for example, alkyl, aryl, and cyclic ethers having from 2 to about 30 carbons. Examples include diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dimethyl isosorbide, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether), and glycofurol (tetrahydrofurfuranyl alcohol polyethylene glycol ether);

[0300] (v) Ketones which typically have from about 3 to about 30 carbons. Examples include acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, and methyl isobutyl ketone;

[0301] (vi) Hydrocarbons which are typically aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, or aromatic hydrocarbons having from about 4 to about 30 carbons. Examples include benzene, cyclohexane,

dichloromethane, dioxolanes, hexane, n-decane, n-dodecane, n-hexane, sulfolane,

tetramethylenesulfone, tetramethylenesulfoxide, toluene, dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO); and tetramethylene sulfoxide;

[0302] (vii) Oils which include, for example, oils of mineral, vegetable, animal, essential, or synthetic origin. These include: mineral oils, such as aliphatic and wax-based hydrocarbons, aromatic hydrocarbons, mixed aliphatic and aromatic based hydrocarbons, and refined paraffin oil; vegetable oils, such as linseed, tung, safflower, soybean, castor, cottonseed, groundnut, rapeseed, coconut, palm, olive, corn, corn germ, sesame, persic, and peanut oil; glycerides, such as mono-, di-, and triglycerides; animal oils, such as fish, marine, sperm, cod-liver, haliver, squaiene, squalane, and shark liver oil; oleic oils; and polyoxyethylated castor oil;

[0303] (viii) Alkyl, alkenyl, or aryl halides which include, for example, alkyl or aryl halides having from 1 to about 30 carbons and one or more halogen substituents. Examples include: methylene chloride; monoethanolamine; petroleum benzin; trolamine; omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids (e.g., alpha-linolenic acid, eicosapentaenoic acid, docosapentaenoic acid, or docosahexaenoic acid); polyglycol ester of 12-hydroxystearic acid and polyethylene glycol (SOLUTOL HS-15, from BASF, Ludwigshafen, Germany); polyoxyethylene glycerol; sodium laurate; sodium oleate; and sorbitan monooleate.

[0304] Other pharmaceutically acceptable solvents for use in the invention are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. General discussion relating to such solvents can be found in, for example, The Chemotherapy Source Book (Williams & Wilkens Publishing), The Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients, (American Pharmaceutical Association, Washington, D.C., and The Pharmaceutical Society of Great Britain, London, England, 1968), Modern Pharmaceutics 3d ed., (G. Banker et. al., eds., Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, New York (1995)), The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, (Goodman & Gilman, McGraw Hill Publishing), Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, (H. Lieberman et. al., eds., Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, New York (1980)), Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 19th ed., (A. Gennaro, ed., Mack Publishing, Easton, PA, (1995)), The United States Pharmacopeia 24, The National Formulary 19, (National Publishing, Philadelphia, PA (2000)); Spiegel, A.J., et al., "Use of Nonaqueous Solvents in Parenteral Products," J. Pharma. Sciences, Vol. 52, No. 10, pp. 917-927 (1963).

[0305] Solvents useful in the invention include, but are not limited to, those known to stabilize present compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. These can include, for example, oils rich in triglycerides, such as safflower oil, soybean oil, and mixtures thereof; and alkyleneoxy- modified fatty acid esters, such as polyoxyl 40 hydrogenated castor oil and polyoxyethylated castor oils (e.g., CREMOPHOR EL solution or CREMOPHOR RH 40 solution). Commercially available triglycerides include INTRALIPID emulsified soybean oil (Kabi-Pharmacia Inc.,

Stockholm, Sweden), NUTRALIPID emulsion (McGaw, Irvine, California), LIPOSYN II 20% emulsion (a 20% fat emulsion solution containing 100 mg safflower oil, 100 mg soybean oil, 12 mg egg phosphatides, and 25 mg glycerin per ml of solution; Abbott Laboratories, Chicago, IL), LIPOSYN III 2% emulsion (a 2% fat emulsion solution containing 100 mg safflower oil, 100 mg soybean oil, 12 mg egg phosphatides, and 25 mg glycerin per ml of solution; Abbott Laboratories, Chicago, IL), natural or synthetic glycerol derivatives containing the docosahexaenoyl group at levels of from about 25 to about 100% (by weight based on the total fatty acid content) (DHASCO from Martek Biosciences Corp., Columbia, MD; DHA MAGURO from Daito Enterprises, Los Angeles, CA; SOYACAL; and TRAVEMULSION). Ethanol in particular is a useful solvent for dissolving a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to form solutions, emulsions, and the like.

[0306] Additional components can be included in the compositions of this invention for various purposes generally known in the pharmaceutical industry. These components tend to impart properties that, for example, enhance retention of the present compounds or salt thereof at the site of administration, protect the stability of the composition, control the pH, and facilitate processing of the compound or salt thereof into pharmaceutical formulations, and the like. Specific examples of such components include cryoprotective agents; agents for preventing reprecipitation of the compound or salt surface; active, wetting, or emulsifying agents (e.g., lecithin, polysorbate-80, TWEEN 80, pluronic 60, and polyoxyethylene stearate); preservatives (e.g., ethyl-p- hydroxybenzoate); microbial preservatives (e.g., benzyl alcohol, phenol, m-cresol, chlorobutanol, sorbic acid, thimerosal, and paraben); agents for adjusting pH or buffering agents (e.g., acids, bases, sodium acetate, sorbitan monolaurate, etc.); agents for adjusting osmolarity (e.g., glycerin); thickeners (e.g., aluminum monostearate, stearic acid, cetyl alcohol, stearyl alcohol, guar gum, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, tristearin, cetyl wax esters, polyethylene glycol, etc.); colorants; dyes; flow aids; non-volatile silicones (e.g., cyclomethicone); clays (e.g., bentonites); adhesives; bulking agents; flavorings; sweeteners; adsorbents; fillers (e.g., sugars such as lactose, sucrose, mannitol, sorbitol, cellulose, calcium phosphate, etc.); diluents (e.g., water, saline, electrolyte solutions, etc.); binders (e.g., gelatin; gum tragacanth; methyl cellulose;

hydroxypropyl methylcellulose; sodium carboxymethyl cellulose; polyvinylpyrrolidone; sugars; polymers; acacia; starches, such as maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, and potato starch; etc.); disintegrating agents (e.g., starches, such as maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, potato starch, and carboxymethyl starch; cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone; agar; alginic acid or a salt thereof, such as sodium alginate; croscarmellose sodium; crospovidone; etc); lubricants (e.g., silica; talc; stearic acid and salts thereof, such as magnesium stearate; polyethylene glycol; etc.); coating agents (e.g., concentrated sugar solutions including gum arabic, talc, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, titanium dioxide, etc.); and antioxidants (e.g., sodium

metabisulfite, sodium bisulfite, sodium sulfite, dextrose, phenols, thiophenols, etc.).

[0307] Techniques and compositions for making parenteral dosage forms are generally known in the art. Formulations for parenteral administration can be prepared from one or more sterile powders and/or granules having a compound or salt of this invention and one or more of the carriers or diluents mentioned for use in the formulations for oral administration. The powder or granule typically is added to an appropriate volume of a solvent (typically while agitating (e.g., stirring) the solvent) that is capable of dissolving the powder or granule. Particular solvents useful in the invention include, for example, water, polyethylene glycol, propylene glycol, ethanol, corn oil, cottonseed oil, peanut oil, sesame oil, benzyl alcohol, sodium chloride, and/or various buffers.

[0308] Emulsions for parenteral administration can be prepared by, for example, dissolving a compound or salt of this invention in any pharmaceutically acceptable solvent capable of dissolving the compound to form a solution; and adding an appropriate volume of a carrier to the solution while stirring to form the emulsion. Solutions for parenteral administration can be prepared by, for example, dissolving a compound or salt of this invention in any pharmaceutically acceptable solvent capable of dissolving the compound to form a solution; and adding an appropriate volume of a carrier to the solution while stirring to form the solution.

[0309] Suppositories for rectal administration can be prepared by, for example, mixing the drug with a suitable nonirritating excipient that is solid at ordinary temperatures, but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug. Suitable excipients include, for example, cocoa butter; synthetic mono-, di-, or triglycerides; fatty acids; and/or polyethylene glycols.

[0310] Every formulation or combination of components described or exemplified herein can be used to practice the invention, unless otherwise stated.

(i) Binding Agents

[0311] Binding agents include, but are not limited to, corn starch, potato starch, or other starches, gelatin, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, sodium alginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacanth, guar gum, cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), polyvinyl pyrrolidone, methyl cellulose, pre-gelatinized starch, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, (e.g., Nos. 2208, 2906, 2910), microcrystalline cellulose, and mixtures thereof. Suitable forms of

microcrystalline cellulose include, for example, the materials sold as AVICEL-PH-101 , AVICEL- PH-103 and AVICEL-PH-105 (available from FMC Corporation, American Viscose Division, Avicel Sales, Marcus Hook, Pennsylvania, USA). An exemplary suitable binder is a mixture of microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose sold as AVICEL RC-581 by FMC Corporation.

(ii) Fillers

[0312] Fillers include, but are not limited to, talc, calcium carbonate (e.g., granules or powder), lactose, microcrystalline cellulose, powdered cellulose, dextrates, kaolin, mannitol, silicic acid, sorbitol, starch, pre-gelatinized starch, and mixtures thereof.

(iii) Lubricants

[0313] Lubricants include, but are not limited to, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, mineral oil, electromagnetic radiation mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc, hydrogenated vegetable oil (e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil, and soybean oil), zinc stearate, ethyl oleate, ethyl laurate, agar, and mixtures thereof. Additional lubricants include, for example, a syloid silica gel (AEROSIL 200, manufactured by W.R. Grace Co. of Baltimore, Maryland, USA), a coagulated aerosol of synthetic silica (marketed by Deaussa Co. of Piano, Texas, USA), CAB-O- SIL (a pyrogenic silicon dioxide product sold by Cabot Co. of Boston, Massachusetts, USA), and mixtures thereof.

(iv) Disintegrants

[0314] Disintegrants include, but are not limited to, agar-agar, alginic acid, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, polacrilin potassium, sodium starch glycolate, potato or tapioca starch, other starches, pre-gelatinized starch, other starches, clays, other algins, other celluloses, gums, and mixtures thereof.

[0315] Tablets or capsules can optionally be coated by methods well known in the art. If binders and/or fillers are used with a compound/bioconjugate of the invention, they are typically formulated as about 50 to about 99 weight percent of the compound/bioconjugate. In one aspect, about 0.5 to about 15 weight percent of disintegrant, and particularly about 1 to about 5 weight percent of disintegrant, can be used in combination with the compound. A lubricant can optionally be added, typically in an amount of less than about 1 weight percent of the compound/bioconjugate.

Techniques and pharmaceutically acceptable additives for making solid oral dosage forms are described in Marshall, SOLID ORAL DOSAGE FORMS, Modern Pharmaceutics (Banker and Rhodes, Eds.), 7:359-427 (1979). Other formulations are known in the art.

[0316] Liquid preparations for oral administration can take the form of solutions, syrups or suspensions. Alternatively, the liquid preparations can be presented as a dry product for constitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use. Such liquid preparations can be prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as suspending agents (e.g., sorbitol syrup, cellulose derivatives or hydrogenated edible fats); emulsifying agents (e.g., lecithin or acacia); non-aqueous vehicles (e.g., almond oil, oily esters, ethyl alcohol or fractionated vegetable oils); and/or preservatives (e.g., methyl or propyl-p-hydroxybenzoates or sorbic acid). The preparations can also contain buffer salts, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and sweetening agents as appropriate. Preparations for oral administration can also be formulated to achieve controlled release of the compound/bioconjugate. Oral formulations preferably contain 10% to 95% compound/bioconjugate. In addition, a compound/bioconjugate of the present invention can be formulated for buccal administration in the form of tablets or lozenges formulated in a conventional manner. Other methods of oral delivery of compounds/bioconjugates of the invention will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention.

Formulation 1

[0317] Hard gelatin capsules are prepared using the following ingredients:

TABLE F1

Ingredients (mg/capsule)

Active Ingredient 250.0 Starch 305.0

Magnesium stearate 5.0

[0318] The above ingredients are mixed and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 560 mg quantities.

Formulation 2

[0319] A tablet formula is prepared using the following ingredients:

TABLE F2

Ingredients (mg/tablet)

Active Ingredient 250.0

Cellulose, microcrystalline 400.0

Colloidal silicon dioxide 10.0

Stearic acid 5.0

[0320] The components are blended and compressed to form tablets, each weighing 665 mg. Formulation 3

[0321] A dry powder inhaler formulation is prepared containing the following components:

TABLE F3

Ingredients Weight %

Active ingredient 5

Lactose 95

[0322] The active ingredient is mixed with the lactose and the mixture is added to a dry powder inhaling appliance.

Formulation 4

[0323] Tablets, each containing 60 mg of active ingredient, are prepared as follows:

TABLE F4

Ingredients Milligrams

Active ingredient 60.0 Starch 45.0

Microcrystalline cellulose 35.0

Polyvinylpyrrolidone (as 10% solution in water) 4.0

Sodium carboxymethyl starch 4.5

Magnesium stearate 0.5

Talc 1.0

Total 150.0

[0324] The active ingredient, starch and cellulose are passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve and mixed thoroughly. The solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone is mixed with the resultant powders which are then passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The granules as produced are dried at 50- 60 °C and passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The sodium carboxymethyl starch, magnesium stearate, and talc, previously passed through a No. 30 mesh U.S. sieve, are then added to the granules which, after mixing, are compressed on a tablet machine to yield tablets each weighing 150 mg.

Formulation 5

[0325] Capsules, each containing 80 mg of active ingredient are made as follows:

TABLE F5

Ingredients Milligrams

Active ingredient 80.0

Starch 109.0

Magnesium stearate 1 .0

Total 190.0

[0326] The active ingredient, cellulose, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 190 mg quantities.

Formulation 6

[0327] Suppositories, each containing 225 mg of active ingredient, are made as follows:

TABLE F6 Ingredients Milligrams

Active Ingredient 225

Saturated fatty acid glycerides to 2000

[0328] The active ingredient is passed through a No. 60 mesh U.S. sieve and suspended in the saturated fatty acid glycerides previously melted using the minimum heat necessary. The mixture is then poured into a suppository mold of nominal 2.0 g capacity and allowed to cool.

Formulation 7

[0329] Suspensions, each containing 50 mg of active ingredient per 5.0 ml dose are made as follows:

TABLE F7

Ingredients Milligrams

Active ingredient 50.0 mg

Xanthan gum 4.0 mg

Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (1 1 %)

Microcrystalline cellulose (89%) 50.0 mg

Sucrose 1 .75 g

Sodium benzoate 10.0 mg

Flavor q.v.

Color q.v.

Purified water to 5.0 ml

[0330] The active ingredient, sucrose and xantham gum are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and mixed with a previously made solution of the microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose in water. The sodium benzoate, flavor, and color are diluted with some of the water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce the required volume.

Formulation 8

[0331] Capsules, each containing 150 mg of active ingredient, are made as follows:

TABLE F8 Ingredients Milligrams

Active ingredient 150.0

Starch 407.0

Magnesium stearate 3.0

Total 560.0

[0332] The active ingredient, cellulose, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 560 mg quantities.

3.e: Kits

[0333] Various embodiments of the present invention include kits. Such kits can include a compound/bioconjugate of the present invention, optionally one or more ingredients for preparing a pharmaceutically acceptable formulation of the compound/bioconjugate, and instructions for use (e.g., administration). When supplied as a kit, different components of a compound/bioconjugate formulation can be packaged in separate containers and admixed immediately before use. Such packaging of the components separately can, if desired, be presented in a pack or dispenser device which can contain one or more unit dosage forms containing the compound/bioconjugate. The pack can, for example, comprise metal or plastic foil such as a blister pack. Such packaging of the components separately can also, in certain instances, permit long-term storage without losing activity of the components. In addition, if more than one route of administration is intended or more than one schedule for administration is intended, the different components can be packaged separately and not mixed prior to use. In various embodiments, the different components can be packaged in one combination for administration together.

[0334] It is further contemplated that the compounds and salts of this invention can be used in the form of a kit that is suitable for use in performing the methods described herein, packaged in a container. The kit can contain the compound or compounds and, optionally, appropriate diluents, devices or device components suitable for administration and instructions for use in accordance with the methods of the invention. The devices can include parenteral injection devices, such as syringes or transdermal patch or the like. Device components can include cartridges for use in injection devices and the like. In one aspect, the kit includes a first dosage form including a compound or salt of this invention and a second dosage form including another active ingredient in quantities sufficient to carry out the methods of the invention. The first dosage form and the second dosage form together can include a therapeutically effective amount of the compounds for treating the targeted condition(s).

[0335] In certain embodiments, kits can be supplied with instructional materials. Instructions can be printed on paper or other substrate, and/or can be supplied as an electronic-readable medium, such as a floppy disc, mini-CD-ROM, CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, Zip disc, videotape, audio tape, and the like. Detailed instructions cannot be physically associated with the kit; instead, a user can be directed to an Internet web site specified by the manufacturer or distributor of the kit, or supplied as electronic mail.

[0336] If desired, the emulsions or solutions described above for oral or parenteral

administration can be packaged in IV bags, vials, or other conventional containers in concentrated form, and then diluted with a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid (e.g., saline) to form an acceptable compound concentration before use.

[0337] Kits can include reagents in separate containers such as, for example, sterile water or saline to be added to a lyophilized active component packaged separately. For example, sealed glass ampules can contain lyophilized superoxide dismutase mimetics and in a separate ampule, sterile water, sterile saline or sterile each of which has been packaged under a neutral non- reacting gas, such as nitrogen. Ampules can consist of any suitable material, such as glass, organic polymers, such as polycarbonate, polystyrene, ceramic, metal or any other material typically employed to hold reagents. Other examples of suitable containers include bottles that can be fabricated from similar substances as ampules, and envelopes that can consist of foil-lined interiors, such as aluminum or an alloy. Other containers include test tubes, vials, flasks, bottles, syringes, and the like. Containers can have a sterile access port, such as a bottle having a stopper that can be pierced by a hypodermic injection needle. Other containers can have two

compartments that are separated by a readily removable membrane that upon removal permits the components to mix. Removable membranes can be glass, plastic, rubber, and the like.

STATEMENTS REGARDING INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE AND VARIATIONS

[0338] All references cited throughout this application, for example patent documents including issued or granted patents or equivalents; patent application publications; and non-patent literature documents or other source material; are hereby incorporated by reference herein in their entireties, as though individually incorporated by reference, to the extent each reference is at least partially not inconsistent with the disclosure in this application (for example, a reference that is partially inconsistent is incorporated by reference except for the partially inconsistent portion of the reference).

[0339] The terms and expressions which have been employed herein are used as terms of description and not of limitation, and there is no intention in the use of such terms and expressions of excluding any equivalents of the features shown and described or portions thereof, but it is recognized that various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention claimed. Thus, it should be understood that although the present invention has been specifically disclosed by preferred embodiments, exemplary embodiments and optional features, modification and variation of the concepts herein disclosed may be resorted to by those skilled in the art, and that such modifications and variations are considered to be within the scope of this invention as defined by the appended claims. The specific embodiments provided herein are examples of useful embodiments of the present invention and it will be apparent to one skilled in the art that the present invention may be carried out using a large number of variations of the devices, device components, methods steps set forth in the present description. As will be obvious to one of skill in the art, methods and devices useful for the present methods can include a large number of optional composition and processing elements and steps.

[0340] When a group of substituents is disclosed herein, it is understood that all individual members of that group and all subgroups, including any isomers, enantiomers, and diastereomers of the group members, are disclosed separately. When a Markush group or other grouping is used herein, all individual members of the group and all combinations and subcombinations possible of the group are intended to be individually included in the disclosure. When a compound is described herein such that a particular isomer, enantiomer or diastereomer of the compound is not specified, for example, in a formula or in a chemical name, that description is intended to include each isomers and enantiomer of the compound described individual or in any combination. Additionally, unless otherwise specified, all isotopic variants of compounds disclosed herein are intended to be encompassed by the disclosure. For example, it will be understood that any one or more hydrogens in a molecule disclosed can be replaced with deuterium or tritium. Isotopic variants of a molecule are generally useful as standards in assays for the molecule and in chemical and biological research related to the molecule or its use. Methods for making such isotopic variants are known in the art. Specific names of compounds are intended to be exemplary, as it is known that one of ordinary skill in the art can name the same compounds differently.

[0341] Optical agents of the present invention may be formulated with pharmaceutically- acceptable anions and/or cations. Pharmaceutically-acceptable cations include among others, alkali metal cations (e.g., Li ⁺ , Na ⁺ , K ⁺ ), alkaline earth metal cations (e.g., Ca ²⁺ , Mg ²⁺ ), non-toxic heavy metal cations and ammonium (NH ₄ ⁺ ) and substituted ammonium (N(R') ₄ ⁺ , where R' is hydrogen, alkyl, or substituted alkyl, i.e., including, methyl, ethyl, or hydroxyethyl, specifically, trimethyl ammonium, triethyl ammonium, and triethanol ammonium cations). Pharmaceutically- acceptable anions include among other halides (e.g., CI ^" , Br ^" ), sulfate, acetates (e.g., acetate, trifluoroacetate), ascorbates, aspartates, benzoates, citrates, and lactate.

[0342] It must be noted that as used herein and in the appended claims, the singular forms "a", "an", and "the" include plural reference unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Thus, for example, reference to "a cell" includes a plurality of such cells and equivalents thereof known to those skilled in the art, and so forth. As well, the terms "a" (or "an"), "one or more" and "at least one" can be used interchangeably herein. It is also to be noted that the terms "comprising", "including", and "having" can be used interchangeably. The expression "of any of claims XX- YY" (wherein XX and YY refer to claim numbers) is intended to provide a multiple dependent claim in the alternative form, and in some embodiments is interchangeable with the expression "as in any one of claims XX- YY."

[0343] Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meanings as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs. Although any methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of the present invention, the preferred methods and materials are now described. Nothing herein is to be construed as an admission that the invention is not entitled to antedate such disclosure by virtue of prior invention.

[0344] In some embodiments, a liposome or micelle may be utilized as a carrier or vehicle for the composition. For example, in some embodiments, the azide compound may be a part of the lipophilic bilayers or micelle, and the targeting ligand, if present, may be on the external surface of the liposome or micelle. As another example, a targeting ligand may be externally attached to the liposome or micelle after formulation for targeting the liposome or micelle (which contains the azide optical agents) to the desired tissue, organ, or other site in the body.

[0345] Every formulation or combination of components described or exemplified herein can be used to practice the invention, unless otherwise stated.

[0346] The present compositions, preparations and formulations can be used both as a diagnostic agent as well as a phototherapy agent concomitantly. For example, an effective amount of the present compositions, preparations and formulations in a pharmaceutically acceptable formulation is administered to a patient. Administration is followed by a procedure that combines photodiagnosis and phototherapy. For example, a composition comprising compounds for combined photodiagnosis and phototherapy is administered to a patient and its concentration, localization, or other parameters is determined at the target site of interest. More than one measurement may be taken to determine the location of the target site. The time it takes for the compound to accumulate at the target site depends upon factors such as pharmcokinetics, and may range from about thirty minutes to two days. Once the site is identified, the phototherapeutic part of the procedure may be done either immediately after determining the site or before the agent is cleared from the site. Clearance depends upon factors such as pharmacokinetics.

[0347] The present compositions, preparations and formulations can be formulated into diagnostic or therapeutic compositions for enteral, parenteral, topical, aerosol, inhalation, or cutaneous administration. Topical or cutaneous delivery of the compositions, preparations and formulations may also include aerosol formulation, creams, gels, solutions, etc. The present compositions, preparations and formulations are administered in doses effective to achieve the desired diagnostic and/or therapeutic effect. Such doses may vary widely depending upon the particular compositions employed in the composition, the organs or tissues to be examined, the equipment employed in the clinical procedure, the efficacy of the treatment achieved, and the like. These compositions, preparations and formulations contain an effective amount of the composition(s), along with conventional pharmaceutical carriers and excipients appropriate for the type of administration contemplated. These compositions, preparations and formulations may also optionally include stabilizing agents and skin penetration enhancing agents.

[0348] Methods of this invention comprise the step of administering an "effective amount" of the present diagnostic and therapeutic compositions, formulations and preparations containing the present compounds, to diagnosis, image, monitor, evaluate, treat, reduce, alleviate, ameliorate or regulate a biological condition and/or disease state in a patient.. The term "effective amount," as used herein, refers to the amount of the diagnostic and therapeutic formulation, that, when administered to the individual is effective diagnosis, image, monitor, evaluate, treat, reduce alleviate, ameliorate or regulate a biological condition and/or disease state. As is understood in the art, the effective amount of a given composition or formulation will depend at least in part upon, the mode of administration (e.g. intravenous, oral, topical administration), any carrier or vehicle employed, and the specific individual to whom the formulation is to be administered (age, weight, condition, sex, etc.). The dosage requirements needed to achieve the "effective amount" vary with the particular formulations employed, the route of administration, and clinical objectives. Based on the results obtained in standard pharmacological test procedures, projected daily dosages of active compound can be determined as is understood in the art.

[0349] Any suitable form of administration can be employed in connection with the diagnostic and therapeutic formulations of the present invention. The diagnostic and therapeutic formulations of this invention can be administered intravenously, in oral dosage forms, intraperitoneally, subcutaneously, or intramuscularly, all using dosage forms well known to those of ordinary skill in the pharmaceutical arts.

[0350] The diagnostic and therapeutic formulations of this invention can be administered alone, but may be administered with a pharmaceutical carrier selected upon the basis of the chosen route of administration and standard pharmaceutical practice.

[0351] The diagnostic and therapeutic formulations of this invention and medicaments of this invention may further comprise one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient, buffer, emulsifier, surfactant, electrolyte or diluent. Such compositions and medicaments are prepared in accordance with acceptable pharmaceutical procedures, such as, for example, those described in Remingtons Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th edition, ed. Alfonoso R. Gennaro, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa. (1985).

[0352] Whenever a range is given in the specification, for example, a temperature range, a time range, or a composition or concentration range, all intermediate ranges and subranges, as well as all individual values included in the ranges given are intended to be included in the disclosure. As used herein, ranges specifically include the values provided as endpoint values of the range. For example, a range of 1 to 100 specifically includes the end point values of 1 and 100. It will be understood that any subranges or individual values in a range or subrange that are included in the description herein can be excluded from the claims herein.

[0353] As used herein, "comprising" is synonymous with "including," "containing," or

"characterized by," and is inclusive or open-ended and does not exclude additional, unrecited elements or method steps. As used herein, "consisting of excludes any element, step, or ingredient not specified in the claim element. As used herein, "consisting essentially of does not exclude materials or steps that do not materially affect the basic and novel characteristics of the claim. In each instance herein any of the terms "comprising", "consisting essentially of" and "consisting of" may be replaced with either of the other two terms. The invention illustratively described herein suitably may be practiced in the absence of any element or elements, limitation or limitations which is not specifically disclosed herein.

[0354] One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that starting materials, biological materials, reagents, synthetic methods, purification methods, analytical methods, assay methods, and biological methods other than those specifically exemplified can be employed in the practice of the invention without resort to undue experimentation. All art-known functional equivalents, of any such materials and methods are intended to be included in this invention. The terms and expressions which have been employed are used as terms of description and not of limitation, and there is no intention that in the use of such terms and expressions of excluding any equivalents of the features shown and described or portions thereof, but it is recognized that various

modifications are possible within the scope of the invention claimed. Thus, it should be understood that although the present invention has been specifically disclosed by preferred embodiments and optional features, modification and variation of the concepts herein disclosed may be resorted to by those skilled in the art, and that such modifications and variations are considered to be within the scope of this invention as defined by the appended claims.

REFERENCES

[0355] Daniel, M.D. et al. A history of photodynamic therapy. Australia New Zealand Journal of Surgery 1991 , 61 , 340-348.

[0356] Krueger, G.G. Current concepts and review of alefacept in the treatment of psoriasis. Dermatologic Clinics 2004, 22, 407-426.

[0357] Rockson, S.G.; Lorenz, D .; Cheong, W-F.; Woodburn, K.W. Photoangioplasty: an emerging clinical cardiovascular role for photodynamic therapy. Circulation 2000, 102, 591 -596.

[0358] De Vries, H.E.; Moor, A.C.E.; Dubbelman, T.M.A.R.; Van Berkel, T.J.C.; Kuiper, J.

Journal of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics 1999, 289, 528-534.

[0359] Hendrich, C; Seibert, W.E. Phodynamic therapy for rheumatoid arthritis? Lasers in Surgery and Medicine 1997, 21 , 359-364. [0360] Woodburn, K.W.; Fan, Q.; Kessel, D.; Wright, M.; Mody, T.D.; Hemmi, G.; Magda, D.; Sessler, J.; Dow, W.C.; Miller, R.A.; Young, S.W. Journal of Clinical Laser Medicine & Surgery 1996, 14, 343-348.

[0361] Chanh, T.C.; Allan, J. S.; Pervaiz, S.; Matthews, J.L.; Trevino, S.R.; Gulliya, K.S.

Journal of Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndromes 1992, 5, 188-195.

[0362] Dougherty, T.A. et al. Photoradiation therapy II. Cure of animal tumors with

hematoporphyrin and light. Journal of the National Cancer Institute 1975, 55, 1 15-121 .

[0363] Dougherty, T.J. Photochemistry in the treatment of cancer. Advances in Photochemistry 1992, 17, 275-31 1 .

[0364] Henderson, B.W.; Dougherty, T.J.; Malone, P.B. Studies on the mechanism of tumor destruction by photoradiation therapy. Progress in Clinical and Biological Research 1984, 170 (Porphyrin Localization Treat. Tumors), 601 -612.

[0365] Hahn, S.M.; Putt, M.E.; Metz, J.; Shin, D.B.; Rickter, E.; Menon, C; Smith, D.; Glatstein, E.; Fraker, D.L. Busch, T.M. Photofrin uptake in the tumor and normal tissues of patients receiving intraperitoneal photodynamic therapy. Clinical Cancer Research 2006, 12, 5464-5470.

[0366] Moronov, A.F. Synthesis and properties of new chlorine and bacterochlorin

photosensitizers. Proceedings of the SPIE-The International Society for Optical Engineering 1996, 2625(Photochemistry: Photodynamic Therapy and Other Modalities), 23-32.

[0367] Lipshutz, G.S.; Castro, D.J. ; Saxton, R. E.; Haugland, R.P.; Soudant, J. Evaluation of four new carbocyanine dyes for photodynamic therapy with lasers. Laryngoscope 1994, 104(8, PT.1 ), 996-1002.

[0368] Sessler, J.L.; Dow, W.C.; O'Connor, D.; Harriman, A. ; Hemmi, G.; Mody, T.D.; Miller, R.A.; Qing, F.; Springs, S.; Woodburn, K.; Young, S.W. Biomedical applications of lanthanide(lll) texaphyrins as potential photodynamic therapy photosensitizers. Journal of Alloys and

Compounds 1997, 249, 146-152.

[0369] Mody, T.K.; Sessler, J.L. Texaphyrins: a new approach to drug development. Journal of Porphyrins and Phthalocyanines 2001 , 5, 134-142.

[0370] Sessler, J.L. ; Miller, R.A. Texaphyrins. New drugs with diverse clinical applications in radiation and photodynamic therapy. Biochemical Pharmacology 2000, 59, 733-739.

[0371] Bonnett, R. Progress with heterocyclic photosensitizers for the photodynamic therapy (PDT) of tumors. Journal of Heterocyclic Chemistry 2002, 39, 455-470.

[0372] Boyle, R.W.; Dolphin, D. Structure and biodistribution relationships of photodynamic sensitizers. Photochemistry and Photobiology 1996, 64, 469-485. [0373] Schmidt-Drfurth, U.; Bringruber, R.; Hasan, T. Photodynamic therapy in ocular vascular disease. IEEE Journal of Selected Topics in Quantum Electronics 1996, 2, 988-996.

[0374] Mlkvy, P.; Messmann, H.; Regula, J.; Conio, M.; Pauer, M.; Millson, C.E.; MacRobert, A.J.; Brown, S.G. Photodynamic therapy for gastrointestinal tumors using three photosensitizers - ALA induced PPIX, Photofrin, and MTHPC. A pilot study. Neoplasma 1998, 45, 157-161.

[0375] Grosjean, P.; Wagieres, G.; Fontolliet, C; Van Den Bergh, H.; Monnier, P. Clinical photodynamic therapy for superficial cancer in the esophagus and the bronchi: 514 nm compared with 630 nm light irradiation after sensitization with Photofrin II. British Journal of Cancer 1998, 77, 1989-1955.

[0376] Mitton, D.; Ackroyd, R. Photodynamic therapy of Barrett's oesophagus and oesophageal carcinoma - how I do it. Photodiagnostics and Photodynamic Therapy 2006, 3, 96-98.

[0377] Li, L.; Luo, R.; Liao, W.; Zhang, M.; Luo, Y.; Miao, J. Clinical study of photofrin photodynamic therapy for the treatment of relapse nasopharyngeal carcinoma. Photodiagnostics and Photodynamic Therapy 2006, 3, 266-271.

[0378] Chen, B.; Pogue, B.; Luna, J.M.; Hardman, R.L.; Hoopes, P.J.; Hasan, T. Tumor vascular permeabilization by vascular-targeting photosensitization: effects, mechanism, and therapeutic implications. Clinical Cancer Research 2006, 12(3, Pt.1 ), 917-923.

[0379] Luo, Y. et al. Rapid initiation of apoptosis by photodynamic therapy. Photochemistry and Photobiology 1996, 63, 528-534.

[0380] Rajagopalan, R.; Kuntz, R.R.; Sharma, U.; Volkert, W.A.; Pandurangi, R.S. Chemistry of bifunctional photoprobes: development of novel rhenium photoconjugates of human serum albumin and Fab fragments. Journal of Organic Chemistry 2002, 67, 6748-6757.

[0381] Reiser, A.; Marley, R. Photolysis of aromatic azides. III. Quantum yield and

mechanism. Transactions of the Faraday Society 1968, 64, 1806-1815.

[0382] Pasto, D.L; Cottard, F. Demonstration of the synthetic utility of the generation of alkoxy radicals by the photo-induced, homolytic dissociation of alkyl 4-nitrobenzenesulfenates.

Tetrahedron Letters 1994, 35, 4303-4306,

[0383] Amaudrut J.; Wiest, O. The thermal sulfenate-sulfoxide rearrangement: A radical pair mechanism. Journal of the American Chemical Society 2000, 122, 3367-3374,

[0384] Padwa, A.; Koehler, K.F.; Rodriguez, A. New synthesis of β-lactams based on nitrone cycloaddtion to nitroalkenes. Journal of Organic Chemistry 1984, 49, 282-288.

[0385] Scheiner, P.; Chapman, O.L.; Lassila, J.D. Photolysis of dihydro-1 ,2-oxazines. Journal of Organic Chemistry 1969, 34, 813-816. [0386] Mukai, T.; Kumagai, T.; Saiki, H.; Kawamura, Y. Photochemical behavior of cyclic imino ethers: the nitrogen-oxygen bond fission, syn-anti isomerization and cycloaddition reactions in the C:N-0 chromophore. Journal of Photochemistry 1981 , 17, 365-368.

[0387] Mackay, D.; Marx, U.F.; Waters, W.A. An attempt to study reactions of the free benzoyl radical: reactions of azodibenzoyl and related compounds. Journal of the Chemical Society 1964, 4793-4800.

[0388] Levek, T.J.; Kiefer, E.F. The mechanism of allene cycloadditon. III. Thermal and photochemical generation of 2,2'-bis(1 ,1-dimethylallyl)biradical from an azocyclane precursor. Journal of the American Chemical Society 1976, 98, 1875-1879.

[0389] Rajagopalan, R.; Achilefu, S.A.; Jimenez, H.; Webb, E.G.; Schmidt, M.A.; Bugaj, J.E.; Dorshow, R.B. Targeted Type 1 phototherapeutic agents using azido-peptide bioconjugates. Proceedings of SPIE 2001 , 4259, 129-132.

[0390] Jaalouk, D. Compositions and methods related to peptide that selectively bind leukemia cells. WO 2006/010070. 2006.

[0391] Dinerman, C.E. Spectroscopic analysis of azide decomposition products for use in pyrotechnically initiated carbon dioxide chemical laser. Report AD780788 (RDTR No. 269), Naval Ammunition Depot, Applied Science Department, Crane, Indiana. May 1974.